- Computers & electronics
- Telecom & navigation
- Telephones
- Panasonic
- Telephone Answering Machine
- Installation manual
- 303 Pages
Panasonic KX-TA624 Hybrid System, KX-T7130, KX-T7020, KX-T7040 telephone, KX-T7050 Cordless Phone, telephone answering machine, Facsimile, KX-T30865 Doorphones, Voice Processing System, KX-TA62477, KX-TA62474 Expansion Card Installation Manual
Below you will find brief information for Hybrid System KX-TA624, telephone KX-T7130, telephone KX-T7020, telephone KX-T7040, Cordless Phone KX-T7050, Telephone Answering Machine KX-T30865, Expansion Card KX-TA62477, Expansion Card KX-TA62474. This document will walk you through the installation process of your new Panasonic Hybrid System. It provides information about wiring the system, connecting the extension, installing optional cards and configuring the system settings. In addition, it includes features overview, troubleshooting guide and a description of the system programming.
advertisement
Assistant Bot
Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.
PSQX1708ZA-00E.QX 99.10.15 1:40 PM Page 1
Advanced Hybrid System
Installation Manual
MODEL NO.
KX-TA624
Please read this manual before connecting the Advanced Hybrid System.
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 2
System Highlights
System Capacity
Basic System
Expansion
Extensions
Exchange lines
Maximum extensions
Maximum exchange lines
Special System Points
System Expansion
This system can expand the exchange lines and extension capacity by installing an optional card.
☞
2– 24
8
3
24
6
Calling from the outside
(Direct Inward System Access)
External callers can call extensions in the system. If you install an optional card, an outgoing message will greet the caller and give information about how to access an extension.
☞
3– 22
Hybrid
This system can accept Panasonic analogue proprietary telephones. Also, single line devices such as single line telephones, facsimiles and data terminals can be connected.
2
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 3
Precautions
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience.
A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer.
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS
INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
WARNING : THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
IMPORTANT : The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green-and-yellow: Earth
Blue: Neutral
Brown: Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or
GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse : Open the-fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover.
3
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 4
4
Precautions
This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2-wire Loop calling unguarded clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling.
The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be connected as an extension.
Operation in Power Failure
In the event of a power failure, two single line telephones connected to extension ports 01 and 09 will be directly connected to the following Exchange lines:
Exchange line 1 : extension port 01
Exchange line 4 : extension port 09
• Set the Dialling Mode (Tone or Pulse) of your telephone, according to the Exchange line.
• 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.
Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and subsidiary apparatus.
999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the Exchange line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency (999) and (112) service.
During dialling, this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line. this is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service.
‘Prevention of access by user. This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorised personnel. This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment, such that user access is prevented. Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus.’
Caution:
Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit (or digits).
Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation.
Notice:
This PBX should only be used on B•T lines on which specific BT services or facilities are provided.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 5
Precautions
• The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 %.
• Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments, such as bathrooms or swimming pools.
• The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing.
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Advanced Hybrid System.
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 ˚C) and vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or other holes of this unit.
• If there is any trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug a single line telephone into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect your system to the line until the system has been repaired. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that the problem is in the telephone network, and not in your system.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or the like, or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.
WARNING
THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS
BECOMING ACCESSIBLE, DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD
IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER.
DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE
POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT, AND
RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST.
THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG. FOR SAFETY
REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING
CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO
REGULATIONS.
THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IS USED AS THE MAIN DISCONNECT DEVICE,
ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET-OUTLET IS LOCATED/INSTALLED NEAR THE
EQUIPMENT AND IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
5
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 6
6
Precautions
For your future reference
SERIAL NO.
(found on the bottom of the unit)
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER’S ADDRESS
DATE OF PURCHASE
Note • This Installation Manual does not show the complete model number that indicates the country where your equipment should be used. The model number of your unit is found on the label affixed to the unit.
MODEL NO. – – – – – – – –
(label)
APPROVED
for connection to telecommunication systems specified in the instructions for use subject to the conditions set out in them.
610186
Warning:
This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
This unit complies with the EU Directives.
73 / 23 / EEC
89 / 336 / EEC
92 / 31 / EEC
93 / 68 / EEC
“Electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits.”
“Electromagnetic compatibility” (basic standard)
“Electromagnetic compatibility” (amendment)
“Marking”
The CE mark on this unit certifies compliance with the above mentioned Directives.
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 7
Introduction
Structure of the Manual
This manual consists of the following sections:
Section 1. Basic System Construction
Provides general information on the system including connection diagrams.
Section 2. Installation
Contains the system installation and wiring instructions, as well as how to install the optional cards.
Section 3. Features
Describes the optional and programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides information about the conditions, required System Programming, connection references, related features and operating instructions references for every feature.
Section 4. System Programming
Describes the steps required to assign features to extensions or to the system.
Section 5. Appendix
Provides specifications and the default values of the System Programming.
Section 6. Troubleshooting
Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting.
Section 7. Programming Tables
Provides programming tables for user-programmed data.
Description of the Symbols Mainly Used in this manual
!
!
☞
Additional information and conditions.
The feature or program references.
7
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 8
8
Contents
Section 1 Basic System Construction
Section 2 Installation
2.1
Before Installation .................................................................................
2-2
2.2
Unpacking ..............................................................................................
2-4
2.3
Names and Locations ............................................................................
2-4
2.4
Wall Mounting .......................................................................................
2-5
2.5
Frame Ground Connection ..................................................................
2-6
2.6
Opening the Top Front Cover ..............................................................
2-6
2.7
Exchange Line Connection...................................................................
2-7
2.8
Extension Connection ...........................................................................
2-10
2.9
External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection...............................
2-12
2.10 External Music Connection ..................................................................
2-13
2.11 Parallelled Telephone Connection .......................................................
2-14
2.12 Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection ............................................
2-15
2.13 Printer and PC Connection..................................................................
2-16
2.14 Location of Optional Cards..................................................................
2-19
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation ..............................................
2-19
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection ..........................................
2-21
2.17 Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474) .........................
2-25
2.18 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer .............................
2-30
2.19 Securing the Cords................................................................................
2-31
2.20 Closing the Front Cover .......................................................................
2-31
2.21 Starting the System for the First Time ...............................................
2-32
2.22 System Restart .......................................................................................
2-33
2.23 System Data Clear.................................................................................
2-34
Section 3 Features
A
Absent Message Capability ................................................................
3-2
Account Code Entry ...........................................................................
3-3
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice ..........................................................
3-3
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On) ...............................................
3-4
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number........................................
3-4
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) .....................................................
3-5
B
Busy Extension Signalling .................................................................
3-10
C
Call Barring ........................................................................................
3-11
Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class ..............................
3-13
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling ...........................................
3-13
Call Barring Override by Account Codes ..........................................
3-14
Call Forwarding..................................................................................
3-15
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ..................................
3-15
Call Park .............................................................................................
3-16
Call Pickup .........................................................................................
3-17
Call Splitting.......................................................................................
3-17
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 9
Contents
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line ......................................................
3-18
Call Transfer – to Extension...............................................................
3-18
Call Waiting ........................................................................................
3-19
Conference (3-party) ..........................................................................
3-20
Conference (5-party) ..........................................................................
3-21
D
Data Line Security..............................................................................
3-21
Date and Time Setting ........................................................................
3-22
Direct In Line (DIL) ...........................................................................
3-22
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)...............................................
3-22
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7130 only) ................................
3-28
Distinctive Dial Tones ........................................................................
3-28
Do Not Disturb (DND).......................................................................
3-29
Door Opener .......................................................................................
3-30
Doorphone Call ..................................................................................
3-30
DSS Console.......................................................................................
3-31
E
Emergency Call ..................................................................................
3-32
Exchange Line Ringing Selection ......................................................
3-32
Executive Busy Override....................................................................
3-33
Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7130 only) ............................
3-33
Extension Feature Clear .....................................................................
3-34
Extension Group.................................................................................
3-35
Extension Hunting ..............................................................................
3-36
Extension Lock...................................................................................
3-36
Extension Password / System Password ............................................
3-37
External Feature Access .....................................................................
3-38
F
Flexible Buttons..................................................................................
3-39
H
Handsfree Answerback .......................................................................
3-40
Handsfree Operation...........................................................................
3-40
Hold ....................................................................................................
3-40
Host PBX Access................................................................................
3-41
I
Intercept Routing ...............................................................................
3-42
Intercom Calling.................................................................................
3-42
L
Language Selection ............................................................................
3-43
Limited Call Duration ........................................................................
3-43
Line Access Keys ...............................................................................
3-43
Log-In/Log-Out ..................................................................................
3-44
M
Message Waiting.................................................................................
3-45
Microphone Mute ...............................................................................
3-45
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM) .....................................
3-46
O
One-Touch Dialling ............................................................................
3-46
Operator / Manager Extension ...........................................................
3-47
Operator Call ......................................................................................
3-47
Outgoing Message (OGM) .................................................................
3-48
Outside Calling...................................................................................
3-52
9
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 10
10
Contents
P
Paging .................................................................................................
3-53
Parallelled Telephone Connection ......................................................
3-54
Personal Speed Dialling .....................................................................
3-54
Pickup Dialling...................................................................................
3-55
Polarity Reverse Detection .................................................................
3-55
Power Failure Transfer .......................................................................
3-56
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming ...........................................
3-56
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing............................................
3-57
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set ................................
3-57
Pulse to Tone Conversion ...................................................................
3-58
R
Recall ..................................................................................................
3-58
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone.........................................
3-59
Receiving Calls...................................................................................
3-59
Redial..................................................................................................
3-60
Ringing Pattern Selection ...................................................................
3-60
Room Monitor ....................................................................................
3-61
S
Secret Dialling ....................................................................................
3-62
Self-Extension Number Confirmation (KX-T7130 only) ..................
3-62
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ......................................
3-63
System Data Default Set ....................................................................
3-64
System Speed Dialling .......................................................................
3-65
T
Timed Reminder .................................................................................
3-65
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service.......................................................
3-66
U
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) ......................................................
3-67
V
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100 ............................................
3-71
Volume Control .................................................................................
3-74
W
Walking COS ......................................................................................
3-74
Section 4 System Programming
4.1
Before System Programming ...............................................................
4-2
4.2
System Programming............................................................................
4-5
[000] Date and Time Setting..............................................................
4-5
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry ...................................................
4-5
[002] System Password......................................................................
4-6
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment ................................................
4-7
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console......................
4-7
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button ...............................
4-8
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode .................
4-8
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time ..........................
4-9
[008] Operator Assignment ..............................................................
4-9
[009] Extension Number Assignment ..............................................
4-10
[010] LCD Time Display Selection ...................................................
4-11
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting......................................
4-12
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan .......................................
4-13
[100] Hunting Group Set ...................................................................
4-14
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 11
Contents
[101] Hunting Type............................................................................
4-14
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100.............................................
4-15
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100.........................................
4-16
[104] Hold Mode Selection ...............................................................
4-17
[105] Conference Tone ......................................................................
4-17
[106] External Paging Access Tone ...................................................
4-18
[107] DTMF Receiver Check ............................................................
4-18
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension ......................................
4-18
[109] CO Indicator Assignment.........................................................
4-19
[110] Recall Key Mode......................................................................
4-19
[111] Hold Music Selection...............................................................
4-20
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode ................................................
4-20
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection .......................................
4-21
[116] Conference Pattern Selection ...................................................
4-21
[117] Call Pickup Tone ......................................................................
4-22
[118] Pulse Restriction ......................................................................
4-22
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion ..............................
4-22
[120] Bell Frequency .........................................................................
4-23
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection .............
4-23
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access.......................
4-23
[123] Break Ratio ..............................................................................
4-24
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection...................................................
4-24
[125] Call Barring Check for and #..............................................
4-24
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode ...............................................................
4-25
[127] Pickup Group Set .....................................................................
4-25
[200] Hold Recall Time .....................................................................
4-26
[201] Transfer Recall Time................................................................
4-26
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time .....................................................
4-27
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time...........................................................
4-27
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time ..............................................
4-28
[206] Dialling Start Time...................................................................
4-28
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection................................................
4-29
[208] Interdigit Time..........................................................................
4-29
[210] DTMF Time .............................................................................
4-30
[211] No Dial Disconnection.............................................................
4-30
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit .......................................
4-31
[213] Bell Off Detection ....................................................................
4-31
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment .........................................
4-32
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class ..........
4-32
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes........
4-33
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes ..............................................
4-34
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set ...................................................
4-34
[310] Account Codes .........................................................................
4-35
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes ............................................
4-35
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class .....................
4-36
11
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 12
Contents
[350] ARS Selection ..........................................................................
4-37
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)..
4-37
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes ...........................
4-38
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code) ................
4-38
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits ......................................
4-39
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number .......................................
4-39
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection.............................................
4-40
[363] ARS Interdigit Time.................................................................
4-40
[364] ARS Trunk Group ....................................................................
4-41
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes.......................
4-42
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill...................................
4-43
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment ...............................................
4-43
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment ..................................
4-44
[401] Dial Mode ................................................................................
4-44
[402] Pulse Speed Selection ..............................................................
4-45
[403] Host PBX Access Codes ..........................................................
4-45
[404] Trunk Group Assignment.........................................................
4-46
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment
—Day/Night/Lunch .......................................................
4-47
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch .......
4-48
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch .......
4-49
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode —Day/Night/Lunch....................
4-50
[417] Pause Time ...............................................................................
4-51
[418] Recall Time ..............................................................................
4-52
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access ........................
4-52
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal.........................................
4-53
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls ..........................................
4-54
[422] Disconnect Time ......................................................................
4-54
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection ...............................
4-55
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment ....................................
4-56
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection ...............................
4-57
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant ................................................
4-58
[502] OGM Mode Selection ..............................................................
4-59
[503] FAX Connection.......................................................................
4-60
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time ...................................................
4-60
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM...............................................
4-60
[506] DISA Busy Mode.....................................................................
4-61
[507] DISA Intercept Mode...............................................................
4-61
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept ......................................
4-62
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept .........................................
4-62
[510] DISA No Dial Mode ...............................................................
4-63
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection..............................................................
4-63
[514] FAX Tone Detection ................................................................
4-64
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA ............................................
4-64
12
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 13
Contents
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment ....................................................
4-65
[517] DISA AA Wait Time ................................................................
4-65
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time ...........................................................
4-66
[520] UCD Group ..............................................................................
4-66
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time .........................................................
4-66
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time .........................................
4-67
[523] UCD Busy Mode......................................................................
4-67
[524] UCD Intercept Mode................................................................
4-68
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept .......................................
4-68
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept ..........................................
4-68
[600] Extension Group Assignment ..................................................
4-69
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment
—Day/Night/Lunch .......................................................
4-69
[604] Extension Name Setting...........................................................
4-70
[605] Account Code Entry Mode ......................................................
4-71
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line ..........................................
4-72
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line .....................................
4-72
[608] Executive Busy Override .........................................................
4-73
[609] Do Not Disturb Override .........................................................
4-73
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection............................................
4-74
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension ..................
4-74
[612] Room Monitor Assignment......................................................
4-75
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection .......................
4-75
[614] Internal Pulse Detection ...........................................................
4-76
[615] LCD Language Assignment .....................................................
4-77
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch ..
4-78
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch .............
4-79
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection ..........................
4-80
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection...........................................
4-80
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time ........................................................
4-81
[709] Door Opener Time ...................................................................
4-81
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters.........................
4-82
[801] SMDR Parameter .....................................................................
4-83
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing.......................
4-83
[803] Secret Speed Dialling / One-Touch Dialling Printing .............
4-84
[804] System Data Dump ..................................................................
4-84
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection ..............................................
4-85
[806] SMDR Language Assignment..................................................
4-86
[998] ROM Version............................................................................
4-86
[999] System Data Clear....................................................................
4-87
13
PSQX1708ZA-01E.QX 99.10.15 5:30 PM Page 14
Contents
Section 5 Appendix
5.1
Default Values ........................................................................................
5-2
5.2
Specifications .........................................................................................
5-7
Section 6 Troubleshooting
6.1
While Installing .....................................................................................
6-2
6.2
While Connecting ..................................................................................
6-3
6.3
While Operating ....................................................................................
6-4
Section 7 Programming Tables
Template
14
PSQX1708ZA-02E.QX 99.10.15 5:31 PM Page 1
Section 1
Basic System Construction
PSQX1708ZA-02E.QX 99.10.15 5:31 PM Page 2
1 Basic System Construction
The KX-TA624 has a basic capacity of 8 extensions and 3 exchange lines. It is capable of supporting Panasonic analogue proprietary telephones, and single line devices such as single line telephones, facsimiles and data terminals.
To expand its capabilities, the system can be equipped with optional components or customer-supplied peripherals such as an external speaker, external music source (e.g. a radio) and door opener.
System Connection Diagram
6 Exchange Lines to exchange lines 1 – 3 (initial) to exchange lines 4 – 6 (additional)
(Lightning Protectors)
External Music Source
Printer or Computer
(one pair)
Amplifier Speaker
24 Extensions
Extension ports 01 – 08 (initial)
Extension ports 09 – 24 (additional)
(two pair)
(two pair)
Single Line Telephone
(one pair)
KX-T7130
(two pair)
KX-T7020
Data Terminal
Door Openers
(one pair)
KX-T7040
(two pair)
Panasonic
Cordless Phone
(one pair)
Panasonic
Panasonic
Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile
(one pair)
Panasonic
Doorphones
KX-T30865
Voice Processing System
KX-T7050
!
!
• We recommend connecting a display proprietary telephone at extension port 01.
• Parallel connection of telephones is possible. (
☞
2.11, Parallelled Telephone
Connection)
• A proprietary telephone cannot be connected to extension ports 17 through 24.
Only a single line telephone (SLT) can be connected.
1-2
Basic System Construction
: needs optional card.
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 1
Section 2
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 2
2.1
Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system and terminal equipment.
Safety Installation Instructions
When installing telephone wiring, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone ports in wet locations unless the port is specifically designed for wet locations.
3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
4. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Installation Precautions
This system is designed for wall mounting only. Avoid installing in the following places.
(Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discolouration.)
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range: 0 °C – 40 °C)
2. Sulphuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or contacts.
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the system.
5. Near high-frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners. (It is preferable not to install the system in the same room with the above equipment.)
7. Install at least 1.8 m away from radios and televisions. (Both the system and Panasonic proprietary telephones)
8. Do not obstruct area around the system (for reasons of maintenance and inspection — be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the system).
Wiring Precautions
Be sure to follow these instructions when wiring the unit:
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc.
If the cables are run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors to prevent the wires from being stepped on.
Avoid wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment. Otherwise, the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment.
2-2
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 3
2.1
Before Installation
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipment such as single line telephones, data terminals, answering machines, computers, voice processing systems, etc., except Panasonic proprietary telephones (e.g. KX-T7130).
5. Unplug the system during wiring. After all of the wiring is completed, plug in the system.
6. Mis-wiring may cause the system to operate improperly. Refer to Section 6.1 “While
Installing” and Section 6.2 “While Connecting”.
7. If an extension does not operate properly, disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again, or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again.
8. The system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.
9. Exchange lines should be installed with lightning protectors. For details, refer to Section
2.7 “Exchange Line Connection”, Installing Lightning Protectors.
POWER
Side View
Warning: Static sensitive connectors
Warning:
Static sensitive devices are used. To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity, do not touch connectors indicated to the left. To discharge body static, touch ground or wear a grounding strap.
Installation
2-3
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.21 5:10 PM Page 4
2.2
Unpacking
Unpack the box and check the items below.
Main Unit
AC Cord
Order No. PSWAT206E
Telephone Line Cords
(2-conductor wiring)
Order No. PSJA1066Z
Telephone Line Cords
(4-conductor wiring)
Order No. PQJA151Z
Screws (Wall Mounting)
Order No. PQHE5004Z
Washers (Wall Mounting)
Order No. XWG35FY
Pager Connector
Order No. PQJP1E1Z
1
1
3
8
3
3
1
Music Source Connector
Order No. PQJP1E1Z
Installation Manual
Order No. PSQX1708Y
Operating Instructions
Order No. PSQX1709Y
Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card
Order No. PSQX1744Y
SLT User Guide
Order No. PSQX1753Z
System Clear Leaflet
Order No. PSQW1412Y
Feature Number Leaflet
Order No. PSQW1472Y
KX-TA62460
Screws
Order No. XYN3+F12FN
Terminal Boxes
Order No. PQJS1T30Z
Telephone Line Cords
(4-conductor wiring)
Order No. PQJA48W
1
2
2
Optional Cards
(For your reference)
KX-TA62474
Screws
Order No. XYN3+F8
Extension Connectors
Order No. PSJP36A67Z
2
2
KX-TA62477
Extension Bolts
Order No. PSHE1051Z
Extension Connectors
Order No. PSJP36A67Z
Spacer
Order No. PSHR1172Z
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2.3
Names and Locations
Extension Ports
Exchange Line Ports
POWER
Strap (for cables)
Paging Port
External Music Port
Power Switch
Protective Earth Terminal
AC Inlet
Power Indicator
Side View
Serial Interface
(RS-232C)
2-4
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 5
2.4
Wall Mounting
This set is designed for wall mounting only. The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit. If screws other than the ones supplied are used, use screws with the same diameter as the ones enclosed.
Mounting on a Wooden Wall
1. Place the template (on the last page) on the wall to mark the screw positions.
Template
2. Install the screws (included) into the wall.
Wooden
Wall
Drive the screw to this position
3. Hook the main unit on the screw heads.
Installation
2-5
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 6
2.5
Frame Ground Connection
IMPORTANT!!!
Connect the frame of the main unit to the ground.
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Insert the grounding wire (usersupplied).
To the ground
Screw
3. Tighten the screw.
4. Connect the grounding wire to the ground.
2.6
Opening the Top Front Cover
1. Loosen the screw.
2. Remove the top front cover.
Screw
Top front cover
!
!
• The screw cannot be removed from the cover.
2-6
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 7
2.7
Exchange Line Connection
Connection
1. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports
(CO 1 through 3) on the system.
2. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange.
View of TEL Port (Exchange Line)
A: Tip
B: Ring
A B
POWER
To Terminal Board or Ports from the Local Exchange
!
!
• Exchange Line ports are at TNV.
Installing Lightning Protectors
A lightning protector is a device to be installed on an exchange line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging the equipment.
A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line. Problems due to lightning surges have been steadily increasing with the development of electronic equipment.
In many countries, there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector. A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 V.
This system should be installed with lightning protectors. In addition, grounding (connection to earth ground) is very important to protect the system (
☞ 2.5, Frame Ground Connection).
Installation
2-7
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 8
2.7
Installation
Exchange Line Connection
CO
Lightning
Protectors
CO
Terminal
Board
CO
System
EXTN.
Protective
Earth
Terminal
EXTN.
TEL
EXTN.
TEL
Frame Ground
Ground
CO: Exchange line
EXTN.: Extension line
TEL: Telephone
Outside Installation
If you install an extension outside of the main building, the following precautions are recommended:
(1) Install the extension wire underground.
(2) Use a conduit to protect the wire.
(Main Building)
Protectors
CO
(Another Building)
CO
Main
Distribution
Frame
CO
EXTN
Main
Unit
EXTN
EXTN
EXTN
Lightning
Protector
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
SLT
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@g
@@g
PT
?@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@
@@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@
@@
@@
TEL
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@g @@g @@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
@@
?@@
?@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
TEL
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@g @@g @@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
?@@
?@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
Earth
Note • The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO.
2-8
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 9
2.7
Exchange Line Connection
Installation of an Earth Rod
Lightning
Protectors
CO
Grounding Wire
System
(Underground)
Rod
1) Installation location of the earth rod . . . . . . Near the protector
2) Check obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
3) Composition of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . Metal
4) Depth of the earth rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . More than 50 cm
5) Size of the grounding wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thickness more than ø1.6 mm
Note • The above example is only a recommendation.
• The length of the earth rod and required depth depend on the composition of the soil.
Installation
2-9
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 10
2.8
Extension Connection
Extension ports 01 through 08 can be used for all kinds of telephones.
Telephone Wiring
The maximum length of the extension line cord (twisted cable) which connects the system and the extension is as follows.
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 140 m
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 229 m
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 360 m
(Extension Loop Limit: 40
Ω
)
Proprietary Telephone
Single Line Telephone
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 698 m
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 1128 m
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 1798 m
(Extension Loop Limit: 600
Ω
including set)
ø 0.5 mm (26 AWG); Under 140 m
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 229 m
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 360 m
(Extension Loop Limit: 40
Ω
)
DSS Console
(KX-T7040)
2 or 4-conductor wiring is required for each extension as listed below. There are 4 pins possible for connection: “T” (Tip), “R” (Ring), “L” (Low) and “H” (High).
Telephone
Single line telephones
Proprietary telephone
(e.g., KX-T7130)
Wiring
1 pair wire (A,B)
2 pair wire (L, H, A, B)
!
!
• If a telephone or answering machine with an A-A1 relay is connected to the system, set the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone or answering machine to the OFF position.
• Extension ports are at TNV.
2-10
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 11
2.8
Extension Connection
Connection
Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the ports
(JACK 01 through 08) on the system.
View of TEL Port (Extension)
H: High
A: Tip
B: Ring
L: Low
H A B L
To extensions
(JACK 01–08)
POWER
!
!
• System extensions must be located within the same building as the KX-TA624.
Installation
2-11
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 12
2.9
External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
One external pager (user-supplied) can be connected to the system as illustrated below.
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter).
• Output impedance: 600
Ω
Maximum length of the cable
ø 0.8 mm – ø 1.3 mm: Under 10 m
Paging Port
PAGING
POWER
Speaker
Amplifier
Paging Equipment
!
!
☞
• To adjust the sound level of the pager, use the volume control on the amplifier.
• Paging port is at SELV.
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paging
2-12
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 13
2.10
External Music Connection
One music source, such as a radio (user-supplied), can be connected to the system as illustrated below.
Insert the plug to the earphone/headphone port on the external music source.
Use an EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (2-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter).
• Input impedance: 8
Ω
Maximum length of the cable
ø 0.8 mm – ø 1.3 mm: Under 10 m
External Music Port
POWER
EXT.
MUSIC
External Music source
!
!
• System programming for the music sources used for Music on Hold and Background
Music (BGM) is required.
• To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold, use the volume control on the external music source.
• External Music port is at SELV.
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
Installation
2-13
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 14
2.11
Parallelled Telephone Connection
Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone as follows.
Using a Modular T-Adaptor
4-conductor wiring cord
For a proprietary telephone:
Connect pins “A”, “B”, “H” and “L”.
2-conductor wiring cord
Connect pins “A” and “B”.
Proprietary Telephone
Single Line Telephone
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Parallelled Telephone Connection
2-14
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 15
2.12
Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection
If your telephone is polarity sensitive, follow the procedure below:
1. Complete all the required extension wiring.
2. Confirm that dialling can be done from all the extensions using a touch-tone telephone.
If dialling fails, the polarity between the extension and the system must be reversed.
Exchange Line
Reverse here
Exchange Line
Extension
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Extension
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
3. Reverse as shown.
4. Unplug the system.
5. Connect all exchange lines.
6. Confirm that dialling can be done on the following extension using a touch-tone telephone.
Extension (A, B) of port 01: Exchange line 1
If dialling fails, the polarity between the system and the exchange line must be reversed.
7. Reverse as shown.
8. Every time an extension telephone is replaced, repeat the procedure above.
Reverse here
Installation
2-15
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 16
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
A user-supplied printer or personal computer (PC) can be connected to the system. These are used to print out or refer to the SMDR call records and system programming data.
Connect the printer cable or the PC cable to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) connector. The cable must be shielded and the maximum length is 2 m.
Serial Interface
(RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)
Printer or Computer
Arrange the cables so that the printer will be connected to the system as shown in the appropriate chart on the following page.
The pin configuration of the Serial Interface (RS-232C) Connector is as follows.
Signal Name Pin
No.
2
3
4
7
8
5
6
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
Received Data
Transmitted Data
Data Terminal Ready
Signal Ground
Data Set Ready
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Circuit Type
AB
CC
CA
CB
EIA CCITT
BB 104
BA
CD
103
108.2
102
107
105
106
2-16
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 17
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
Connection Chart for a Printer / Personal Computer with the System
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 9-pin cable, follow the chart below.
System
Circuit type
(EIA)
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
Signal name
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
Pin no.
2
7
8
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
7
8
9-pin Cable Printer/PC
Circuit
Pin Signal no.
name type
(EIA)
2 RXD BB
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
If you connect a printer or a PC with a 25-pin cable, follow the chart below.
Circuit type
(EIA)
BB
BA
CD
AB
CC
CA
CB
System
Signal name
RXD
TXD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
Pin no.
2
5
6
7
8
3
4
20
7
5
6
8
25-pin Cable Printer/PC
Circuit
Pin Signal no.
name type
(EIA)
1
3
FG
RXD
AA
BB
2 TXD
DTR
SG
CTS
DSR
DCD
BA
CD
AB
CB
CC
CF
Installation
2-17
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 18
2.13
Printer and PC Connection
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Signals
Frame Ground: FG
Connects the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord.
Transmitted Data: SD (TXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A “Mark” condition is held unless data or
BREAK signals are being transmitted.
Received Data: RD (RXD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
Conveys signals from the printer.
Request to Send: RS (RTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
This lead remains ON whenever DR (DSR) is ON.
Clear To Send: CS (CTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When the CS (CTS) circuit is ON, it indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS (CTS) circuit is OFF.
Data Set Ready: DR (DSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When the DR (DSR) circuit is ON, it indicates the printer is ready. The DR (DSR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer.
Signal Ground: SG
Connects the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals.
Data Terminal Ready: ER (DTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate that it is ON
LINE. The ER (DTR) circuit being ON does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer. It is switched OFF when the unit is OFF LINE.
Data Carrier Detect: CD (DCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (input)
When ON, it indicates the data terminal (DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4.2, System Programming
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
[801] SMDR Parameter
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2-18
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 19
2.14
Location of Optional Cards
The location of the optional cards is shown below.
Precaution
To protect the printed circuit boards (P-boards) from static electricity, do not touch parts on the P-boards in the main unit and on the optional cards. If accessing the parts is required, wear a grounding strap.
3 CO Line and 8 EXT
Expansion Card
(KX-TA62477) or
8 Extension Expansion
Card (KX-TA62470)
Connector
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
(KX-TA62460) Connector
The front covers are open.
OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491)
Connector
Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)
Connector
NOTE:
Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord before installing an optional card.
2.15
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card (KX-TA62491) can be installed to the system.
The OGM/FAX Detection Card supports the following.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) with OGM:
One of the system features. An outgoing message greets the external caller and gives information so that the caller can access an extension(s) directly.
Facsimile detection:
When the system receives a facsimile transmission signal by DISA, it automatically connects the specified facsimile extension.
1. Remove the 2 screws.
Screws
Installation
2-19
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 20
2.15
OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
2. Open the bottom front cover.
Bottom front cover
3. Attach the OGM/FAX Detection card.
OGM/FAX Detection Card
(KX-TA62491)
Note
Please do not damage this part.
4. Insert the flat cables to the card connector.
Flat cables
☞
5. Close the cover.
• Required System Programming
See ‘Required System Programming’ in Section 3, Features “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)”
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Outgoing Message (OGM)
2-20
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 21
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Four doorphones (KX-T30865) and 4 door openers (user-supplied) can be installed.
Maximum cable length
The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line cord which connects the system is as follows.
ø 0.6 mm (24 AWG); Under 113 m
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 180 m
(Extension Loop Limit: 20
Ω
)
Panasonic
Doorphone
(KX-T30865)
ø 0.8 mm (22 AWG); Under 180 m
Door Opener
Installing the Doorphone
1. Loosen the screw to open the doorphone unit.
Panasonic
Screw
Screws
2. Attach the base cover to a wall using 2 screws.
Note Two kinds of screws are included. Please choose the appropriate one depending on your type of wall.
Type 1: When a doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall.
Type 2: When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall.
Installation
2-21
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 22
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
3. Connect the wires to the screws located in the front cover.
To the terminal box
4. Put the doorphone together and re-install the screw.
Doorphone/Door Opener Installation
Attach the optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the main unit, connect the cord to the
Doorphone/Door Opener Card Connector and secure the screw.
Screw
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
(KX-TA62460)
Doorphone Connectors
Door Opener Terminal
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
Card Connector
2-22
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 23
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Wiring of the Doorphone
1. Connect the Doorphone/Door Opener Card to the terminal boxes using 4-conductor modular connectors.
2. Connect the wires of doorphones 1 and 3 to the red and green screws on the terminal box.
3. Connect the wires of doorphones 2 and 4 to the yellow and black screws on the terminal box.
View of Doorphone Connector Port
Doorphone 2
Doorphone 1
Doorphone 4
Doorphone 3
4-conductor wiring is required.
Panasonic
Doorphone 1
(KX-T30865)
Yellow
Red
4-conductor wiring is required.
Panasonic
Doorphone 3
(KX-T30865)
Yellow
Red
Black
Green
Panasonic
Doorphone 2
(KX-T30865)
Black
Green
Panasonic
Doorphone 4
(KX-T30865)
Installation
2-23
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 24
2.16
Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Connecting Door Openers
1. While pressing the button below a hole with a screw driver, insert the wire from the door opener into the hole.
Door opener 1
Door opener 2
Door opener 4
Door opener 3
To the door openers
2. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.20, Securing the Cords)
!
!
• We recommend using the wire (ø 0.4 mm – ø 1.2 mm) or the equivalent for wiring.
• The wire should be under 3.0 mm in diameter including the coating.
• Door Opener ports are at SELV.
D = 0.4 mm – 1.2 mm
D = Under 3.0 mm
☞
• Required System Programming
Section 4 System Programming
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Door Opener, Doorphone Call
2-24
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 25
2.17
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62477)
To add 3 exchange lines (exchange lines 4 through 6) and 8 extensions (extension ports
09 through 16), use an optional 3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477).
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card Installation (KX-TA62474)
To add 8 extensions (extension ports 17 through 24), use an optional 8 SLT Extension
Expansion Card (KX-TA62474).
This card can be installed directly to the system or to the KX-TA62477.
!
!
• Only a single line telephone (SLT) can be connected to extension ports 17 through 24.
Installing the KX-TA62477
1. Loosen the screws and open the top and bottom front covers.
2. Remove the lower front panel with a suitable tool as shown below. Cut the 6 areas marked with a circle.
Lower front panel
Installation
2-25
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 26
2.17
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth.
4. First, insert the plastic spacer into the hole on the KX-TA62477. Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system, install the KX-TA62477 and secure the 2 extension spacers.
Extension Spacers
3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card
(KX-TA62477)
Caller ID Card Connector
Extension Connectors
Spacer
2-26
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 27
2.17
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports
(CO 4 through 6) on the card. (☞ 2.7, Exchange Line Connection)
6. Connect the line cords to the terminal board or the ports from the Local Exchange.
7. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2 or 4-conductor wiring) into the ports (JACK 09 through 16). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)
8. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.19, Securing the Cords)
9. Close the covers and secure the screws.
Installing the KX-TA62474
1. Loosen the screws and open the front and bottom front covers.
2. Remove the lower front panel in the same way as installing a KX-TA62477. If you install the KX-TA62474 to a KX-TA62477, remove the top front panel with pliers.
Top front panel
3. After cutting the areas, be sure to cut off any excess plastic in order to make the surface smooth. Please refer to installing the KX-TA62477.
Installation
2-27
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 28
2.17
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)
4. Attach the 2 extension connectors to the system first, install the KX-TA62474 and secure the 2 screws.
Screws
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
(KX-TA62474)
Extension Connectors
5. Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords (2-conductor wiring) into the ports
(JACK 17 through 24). (☞ 2.8, Extension Connection)
6. Wrap the strap around all of the cords. (☞ 2.19, Securing the Cords)
7. Close the covers and secure the screws.
2-28
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 29
2.17
Installing a 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion Card (KX-TA62477) and 8 SLT Extn. Expansion Card (KX-TA62474)
Installing the KX-TA62477 and KX-TA62474
1. Install the KX-TA62477 first and then the KX-TA62474.
Screws
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
(KX-TA62474)
Extension Spacers
Extension Connectors
3 CO Line and 8 EXT Expansion Card
(KX-TA62477)
Extension Connectors
Spacer
Installation
2-29
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 30
2.18
Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
Power failure transfer connects a specific single line telephone (SLT) to selected exchange lines in the event of system power failure, as follows.
Exchange line 1 – extension (T, R) port 01
Exchange line 4 – extension (T, R) port 09
Connection of exchange lines 1 and 4, and the respective extensions require no auxiliary connection.
!
!
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by a factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the Camp-on, Saved Number Redial, Last Number
Redial, Call Park and Message Waiting memories.
• The system automatically changes the current connection to the above connection when the power supply stops.
• Proprietary telephones cannot be used during a power failure. Therefore, we recommend connecting SLTs in parallel with proprietary telephones connected to extension ports
01 and 09.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Power Failure Transfer, Parallelled Telephone Connection
2-30
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:46 PM Page 31
2.19
Securing the Cords
1. Wrap the strap around all of the cords.
!
!
• To remove the rivet, use a screw driver as shown below.
Rivet
2.20
Closing the Front Cover
1. Replace the covers and tighten the screws.
2. Tie together all of the connected cords and attach them to the wall so that the cords cannot be pulled out of the system.
Installation
2-31
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:47 PM Page 32
2.21
Starting the System for the First Time
1. Set the Power Switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet.
3. Turn the Power Switch on.
(The power indicator will light.)
4. Perform the following operation with a proprietary telephone connected to JACK 01.
a) Set the MEMORY switch to “PROGRAM” on the back of the telephone.
b) Press #.
c) Enter 1234.
d) Enter 999.
e) Press the NEXT (SP-PHONE) button.
f) Press the SELECT (AUTO ANSWER/MUTE) button until
“All Para” is displayed.
g) Press the STORE (AUTO DIAL/STORE) button.
h) Press the END (HOLD) button.
i) Set the MEMORY switch to “SET” on the back of the telephone.
The system will be initialised with the default values. If the system does not work properly, please see 2.23, “System Data Clear”.
CAUTION • The system will continue to be powered even if the Power Switch is turned
“OFF”.
• The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the outlet is located/installed near the equipment and is easily accessible.
To AC outlet
2-32
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:47 PM Page 33
2.22
System Restart
!
!
After starting the system, if the system does not operate properly, restart the system.
Before restarting the system, try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
System Restart causes the following.
• Camp-on is cleared.
• Calls on Hold are terminated.
• Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
• Calls in progress are terminated.
• Call Park is cleared.
• Message Waiting is cleared.
• Last Number Redial is cleared.
• Saved Number Redial is cleared.
Other data is not cleared by System Restart.
1. Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
• If the system still does not operate properly, please see 2.23, “System Data Clear”.
Installation
2-33
PSQX1708ZA-03E.QX 99.10.15 5:47 PM Page 34
2.23
System Data Clear
When the system does not operate properly after restarting, you can clear the programming data stored in the system. The system will restart with the default settings.
First, try system program [999] “System Data Clear” by following step 4 in 2.21, “Starting the System for the First Time”. If the system still does not operate properly, please follow the procedure below.
1. Slide the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
2. Press the Reset Button.
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position before the power indicator stops flashing.
(The power indicator will flash for about 10 seconds.)
Reset Button
System Clear Switch
CAUTION • Before touching the System Clear Switch and Reset Button, put on a grounding strap.
!
!
• After pressing the Reset Button, return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position in step 3 before the power indicator stops flashing. Otherwise, the system will not clear.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
System Data Default Set
2-34
Installation
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 1
Section 3
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 2
A
3 Features
Absent Message Capability
Allows an extension user to set a message which will be displayed at the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension’s absence. One of 6 messages can be programmed as desired, which are available for any telephone (single line telephone or proprietary telephone). Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers using a proprietary telephone with a LCD can see the message.
!
!
• The 6 messages are shown below. “%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% AM (or PM) (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %%/%% (day / month)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can only select one message at a time. The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Showing Your Message on the Calling Party’s Display
(Absent Message Capability)”
3-2
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 3
3 Features
A
Account Code Entry
An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the SMDR call record. For incoming outside calls, an account code is optional. For outgoing outside calls, there are 4 account input modes programmable in program [605], Option, Forced, Verify–All and Verify–Toll.
Option:
Forced:
A 4-digit code may be entered during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation when a record is needed.
A 4-digit code must be entered within 5 seconds after an exchange line is seized. The code can be any number.
Verify–All: Enables to make an outside call if the code entered within 5 seconds after an extension user seizes an exchange line is the same as one of the account codes programmed in [310].
Verify–Toll: Enables to override call barring temporarily by entering one of the account codes programmed in [310] within 5 seconds after an exchange line is seized. Calls with COS numbers 3 through 5 will be treated as calls with
COS number 2. Calls with COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be affected.
☞
• Required System Programming
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
• Related Feature References
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR),
Call Barring Override by Account Codes
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling with Account Codes (Account Code Entry)”
Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice
This system offers a proprietary telephone user 2 types of intercom calling, Voice Call mode and Tone (ring) Call mode. “Voice Call” informs the called party of an incoming call with the calling party’s voice, while “Tone Call” uses a ring tone. A proprietary telephone user can select “Voice Call” or “Tone Call” in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. If the user selects “Voice Call”, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after the confirmation tone. The calling party can switch the pre-set mode at the called extension, from “Voice
Call” to “Tone Call” or vice versa, by pressing “ ” after dialling the extension number.
!
!
☞
• A rotary telephone user cannot change the pre-set mode at the called extension.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”, Intercom
Alert Assignment
1.7 Useful Features, “Alternate Calling – Ring/Voice”
3-3
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 4
A
3 Features
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
When the selected exchange line or dialled extension is busy, the system will automatically notify an extension user with a callback ringing when the line becomes available. When the user answers the callback ringing:
For an extension: The called extension starts ringing without dialling.
For an exchange line: The line is seized.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Your Telephone Ring Back Automatically When a Line
Becomes Free (Automatic Callback Busy – Camp-On)”
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number
An Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) can be programmed. When an extension user dials an Automatic Line Access number before a telephone number, an available exchange line from the assigned lines in program [419] is seized automatically. If “0” is selected in program [121], the operator call will be “9” automatically. If “9” is selected in program
[121], the operator call will be “0” automatically.
☞
• Related Feature References
Operator Call, Outside Calling
• Required System Programming
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access
3-4
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 5
3 Features
A
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
The system automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time a long distance call is made on the exchange line enabled for ARS feature. It is not necessary to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier.
1. Normal Use
To make a call via the least expensive carrier, the dialled number is modified. The following are modification examples.
Example 1 (Long distance call using Route 1):
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable
[351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digit)”: 0
[355] “Route 1 Exception Codes”: 07
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 0 (No deletion)
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 131(Code of least expensive carrier for a long distance call)
[381] “Route 1 Authorisation Code”: 0123456789
[385] “Route 1 Itemised Bill”: Enable
[389] “Itemised Bill Code Assignment”: 201
<Dialled number>
01633 877 467
<Modified number>
131 0123456789 201 01633 877 467
Example 2 (International call using Route 2):
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable
[352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digit)”: 00
[360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits”: 0
[361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”: 1620 (Code of least expensive carrier for an international call)
[386] “Route 2 Itemised Bill”: Enable
[389] “Itemised Bill Code Assignment”: 201
<Dialled number>
00 44 1344 853941
<Modified number>
1620 201 00 44 1344 853941
Example 3 (Long distance call via the first carrier):
[350] “ARS Selection”: Enable
[359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”: 121
<Dialled number>
121 01633 877 467
<Modified number>
01633 877 467
Features
3-5
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 6
A
3 Features
2. Special Use
If an extension user always uses the Automatic Line Access number (9 or 0) when making an outside call and wants to seize the specified trunk group as below automatically, refer to the following program assignment.
<Example>
• Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for a long distance call
(Long distance calls start with “0”. Carrier code = 131)
• Trunk group which connects with the least expensive carrier for an international call
(International calls start with “00”. Carrier code = 1620)
• Trunk group connected to a mobile telephone
(No modification of the dialled number is necessary.)
To specify how to modify the dialled number, and specify a trunk group for each route
Route
No.
Program
Address
[351]
[354]
[355]
[358]
[360] [361] [364]
Route 1
Route 2
Route 3
0
00
079
07 0 digit
0 digits
0 digit
131
1620 trunk group number 1 trunk group number 1 trunk group number 2
To specify exchange lines in the trunk groups
Program
Address
Exchange
Line No.
[404] Trunk Group
Assignment
1
2
3 trunk group number 1 trunk group number 1 trunk group number 2
[350]
Enable
Enable
Enable
[419] Automatic
Designated
Exchange Line
Access
Enable
Enable
Disable
KX-TA624
Exchange Line
1 2 3
Group1
Group2
Mobile
Jack
First
Carrier
Local Call
Second
Carrier
131 (Long Distance Call)
Third
Carrier
1620 (International Call)
3-6
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 7
3 Features
A
Example 5 [Long distance call using Route 1 (trunk group number 1)]:
<Dialled number>
9 01633 877 467
<Modified number>
131 01633 877 467
Example 6 [International call using Route 2 (trunk group number 1)]:
<Dialled number>
9 00 44 1344 853941
<Modified number>
1620 201 00 44 1344 853941
Example 7 [Mobile telephone call using Route 3 (trunk group number 2)]:
<Dialled number>
9 07979 123456
<Modified number>
07979 123456
• System Programming is required to execute this feature.
• If an extension user makes an outside call using the Automatic Line Access number (9 or 0) and the dialled number does not apply to any numbers assigned in programs [351]–[354], an exchange line which has selected “Enable” in program [419] “Automatic Designated
Exchange Line Access” is automatically seized.
☞
• Required System Programming
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment
Features
3-7
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 8
A
3 Features
Flow chart of possible cases and results for ARS calls
Start
A
*1
Is (another) 1 digit dialled within the ARS Interdigit Time?
No
Yes
Each time a digit is dialled, the system checks the dialled number (other than Host PBX access codes,
Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code).
*2
Is the dialled number a call barring denied code?
No
Yes
Reorder tone
*3
Is the dialled number an emergency call number?
No
Is the dialled number a call barring denied code?
*4
No
Yes
Yes
The dialled number is sent to the Local Exchange.
Reorder tone
Does the dialled number include the 1st carrier access code?
No
Does the area code match a
Route 1 selection code?
*5
Yes
No
Yes
The dialled number (other than the 1st carrier access code) is sent to the Local Exchange.
*6
Does the area code match a Route 1 exception code?
Yes
No
Removing from and adding to the dialled number.
*7
Does the area code match a
Route 2 selection code?
No
No
*9
Does the area code match a
Route 3 selection code?
*11
Does the area code match a
Route 4 selection code?
*13
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
*10
Does the area code match a Route 2 exception code?
Yes
No
*12
Does the area code match a Route 3 exception code?
Yes
No
*14
Does the area code match a Route 4 exception code?
Yes
No
Removing from
*7 and adding to the dialled number.
Removing from and adding to the dialled number.
Removing from and adding to the dialled number.
*7
*7
Route 1 is selected.
*8
Route 2 is selected.
*8
Route 3 is selected.
*8
Route 4 is selected.
*8
Are 7 digits (other than Host PBX access codes, Carrier excepted codes and 1st carrier access code) dialled?
No
Yes
The dialled number is sent to the Local Exchange.
Goes to A
*15
3-8
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 9
3 Features
A
*1: The ARS Interdigit timer is assigned in program [363] “ARS Interdigit Time”.
*2: The codes are assigned in the following programs.
Host PBX access codes: [403] “Host PBX Access Codes”
Carrier excepted codes: [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment”
1st carrier access code: [359] “1st Carrier Selection Code”.
*3: Emergency call numbers are assigned in program [309] “Emergency Dial Number Set”.
*4: Call Barring denied codes are assigned in program [302]-[305] “Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes”.
*5: Route 1 selection codes are assigned in program [351] “Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.
*6: Route 1 exception codes are assigned in program [355] “Route 1 Exception Codes”.
*7: Removing digits are assigned in program [360] “ARS Modification – Removed Digits” and added numbers are in [361] “ARS Modification – Added Number”
*8: The trunk group(s) assigned in program [364] is (are) automatically seized when making a call using the Automatic Exchange Line Access number (0 or 9).
*9: Route 2 selection codes are assigned in program [352] “Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)”.
*10: Route 2 exception codes are assigned in program [356] “Route 2 Exception Codes”.
*11: Route 3 selection codes are assigned in program [353] “Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading
Digits)”.
*12: Route 3 exception codes are assigned in program [357] “Route 3 Exception Codes”.
*13: Route 4 selection codes are assigned in program [354] “Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading
Digits)”.
*14: Route 4 exception codes are assigned in program [358] “Route 4 Exception Codes”.
*15: The system repeats checking until 7 digits are dialled.
Features
3-9
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 10
B
3 Features
Busy Extension Signalling
When an extension user calls a busy extension, the busy extension will hear a Call Waiting tone to know that a call is waiting.
!
!
• This feature is only available if the called extension has set the Call Waiting feature. If the Call Waiting feature is activated, the caller will hear a ringback tone. If not, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
☞
• Related Feature Reference
Call Waiting
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Sending a Call Waiting Tone to a Busy Extension (Busy Extension
Signalling)”
She is on the line.
I will send a Call
Waiting tone.
CALL WAITING TONE
I’ve got another call.
Please hold.
3-10
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 11
3 Features
C
Call Barring
Call Barring is a system programmable feature that can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised toll calls.
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of 5 classes of service (COS). Each COS is programmed to have a call barring class for day mode, night mode and lunch mode.
There are 5 call barring COS numbers available. Call barring COS number 1 is the highest class and the COS number 5 is the lowest. That is, COS number 1 allows all toll calls. COS numbers 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls by combining pre-programmed deny and exception codes shown in the table on the next page.
Denied Codes
An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a call barring COS number between 2 and 5 is first checked against the assigned denied codes in program [302]-[305].
If the first digits of the dialled number (not including the line access code) are not found in the class, the call can be made. Each class can store up to 20 denied codes, each consisting of 11 digits.
Exception Codes
These codes are used to override a programmed denied code. A call denied by the denied codes is checked against the selected exception codes assigned in program [306]. If a match is found, the call can be made.
Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes depends on the COS number.
!
!
☞
• Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire station, should be stored in program
[309] “Emergency Dial Number Set” so that they are exempt from call barring.
• If a stored Host PBX access code in program [403] “Host PBX Access Codes” or a stored carrier code in program [300] “Carrier Excepted Code Assignment” is found in the dialled number, the subsequent telephone numbers will be checked for call barring.
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the call barring check is completed. When the timer expires, an outside outgoing call will be disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial
Disconnection”.
• The call barring class for a locked extension can be assigned in program [312] “Call
Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class” so that even a locked extension can make a local call, etc.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be checked or not on the
Call Barring code in program [125] “Call Barring Check for and #”. This is useful to prevent unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain Local Exchange systems.
• Required System Programming
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Emergency Call
Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling
Call Barring Override by Account Codes
3-11
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 12
C
3 Features
Combination of denied codes and exception codes
COS No.
1
2
3
4
5
No restriction.
Denied Calls
20 denied codes programmed in [302].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [304].
20 denied codes programmed in [302] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [303] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [304] plus
20 denied codes programmed in [305].
Excepted Calls
No restriction.
80 exception codes (code numbers 01-80) programmed in [306].
60 exception codes (code numbers 01-60) programmed in [306].
40 exception codes (code numbers 01-40) programmed in [306].
20 exception codes (code numbers 01-20) programmed in [306].
Flow chart of Call Barring
The user makes a toll call.
Is it a System Speed Dialling number?
Yes
*1
No
Yes
Is the COS number higher than the system speed dialling boundary class?
*2
No or Equal
COS1
What is the
COS number?
COS2 - 5
Is the dialled number found in applicable denied codes?
Yes
No
Is the dialled number found in applicable exception codes?
No
Yes
The call is denied. A reorder tone is returned to the user.
The call is allowed.
*1: System Speed Dialling numbers are assigned in program [001] “System
Speed Dialling Entry”.
*2: The system speed dialling boundary class is assigned in program [301] “Call Barring
– System Speed Dialling
Boundary Class”.
3-12
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 13
3 Features
C
Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class
Allows assigning a call barring class for extensions where the Electronic Extension Lockout or Remote Extension Lock feature has been set.
An extension user usually cannot make an outside call at a locked extension, however if a call barring class is assigned in program [312], the user can make an outside call at the locked extension.
!
!
• The higher call barring class number will take precedence.
For example, if call barring COS number 3 is assigned to an extension and the extension lock boundary class is 4, the extension user is allowed to make a call with call barring
COS number 4.
☞
• Required System Program Address
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class
• Related Feature References
Extension Lock, Call Barring
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling
Calls originated by System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the combination of the System Speed Dialling Boundary Class assigned in program [301] and the class of service (COS) assigned to each extension as follows.
System Speed
Dialling Boundary
Class
COS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
C
C
1
A
C
C
A: allowed C: checked
A
C
2
A
C
C
A
A
3
A
C
C
A
A
4
A
A
C
A
A
5
A
A
A
<Example>
—If the boundary is set to
COS number 2,
The system will allow system speed dialling for COS numbers 1 and 2, but check COS numbers 3,
4 and 5 according to call barring.
☞
• Required System Programming
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class
• Related Feature Reference
Call Barring
Features
3-13
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 14
C
3 Features
Call Barring Override by Account Codes
Allows an extension user to override call barring temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted extension. The user can carry out this feature by entering one of the account codes programmed in [310] “Account Codes” before dialling the telephone number. The user can make a toll call with the COS number 2.
!
!
• The account code “Verify-toll (call barring)” mode at an extension permits users to override their call barrings.
• This feature can be used on extensions assigned to call barring COS numbers 3 through
5. The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.
• If the user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid one, a regular call barring check is done.
• When a user makes a call using this feature, it will appear on the SMDR printout with either the entered 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the entered account code.
This selection is set in program [805].
• Users can also override call barring of another extension by using the Walking COS feature.
Flow chart of Call Barring Override
Call Barring Override by Account Codes is attempted.
Option/Forced
What is the account code mode?
Verify–Toll
No
Yes
Does the entered code match a stored account code?
Yes
Is the COS number 1?
No
The call is made with the
COS number 2.
Verify–All
Does the entered code match a stored account code?
Yes No
The Call Barring COS number remains the same as the extension being used.
The call is not allowed.
A reorder tone is returned to the user.
☞
• Required System Programming
[805] SMDR Account Codes Selection
• Related Feature References
Account Code Entry, Call Barring, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR),
Walking COS
3-14
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 15
3 Features
C
Call Forwarding
Allows an extension user to transfer incoming calls automatically to another extension or to an external destination. The following types are available.
All Calls: All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension.
Busy or No Answer: All incoming calls are forwarded to another extension when the extension user does not answer within the programmed time in
[202] or when the extension is busy.
To an Exchange Line: Allows an extension user enabled in program [607] to forward all incoming intercom calls to an external party.
Follow Me: Allows an extension user to set the Call Forwarding – All Calls feature from another extension.
!
!
• Extensions which have already been assigned as a forwarded destination cannot set the Call
Forwarding feature.
• If the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature has already been set, setting the Call Forwarding feature will cancel DND.
• When using the call forward to an exchange line feature the quality of service may be adversely affected by the attenuation across the public telephone network.
☞
• Required System Programming
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line
• Related Feature Reference
Limited Call Duration
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Forwarding a Call (Call Forwarding)”
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is a disconnect signal sent from the Local Exchange for an outside call. The CPC signal detection is activated by programs [420] and [421].
Program [420] is for incoming outside calls, and [421] is for outgoing outside calls.
☞
• Required System Programming
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Features
3-15
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 16
C
3 Features
Call Park
Allows an extension user to place a held call into a system parking area. Any extension user can retrieve the parked call to perform other operations. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time.
!
!
• If a parked call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], a ring tone or an alarm tone will be heard.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.
• This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone, or more than one intercom call or outside call with a single line telephone.
• During a 5-party conference, this feature cannot be performed.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature Reference
Conference (5-party)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Placing a Call in System Parking Area
(Call Park)”
Parking zone
3-16
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 17
3 Features
C
Call Pickup
<Directed Call Pickup>
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension.
<Group Call Pickup>
Allows an extension user to answer a call ringing at another extension, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group assigned in program [600]. If “Enable” is selected for an extension group in [127], persons in the group can pickup calls just by going off-hook, even though their extension is not ringing.
<Call Pickup Deny>
Allows an extension user to prevent other extensions from picking up a call ringing at the user’s extension with the Call Pickup feature.
<Call Retrieving from a TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)>
Allows an extension user to answer an incoming call received by a TAM extension assigned in program [611].
!
!
☞
• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom or doorphone call with the Directed
Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up with the Directed Call
Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. The tone can be disabled in program [117].
• If a ringing extension sets the Call Pickup Deny feature, an extension user will hear a reorder tone when the user tries to pick up the call.
• Required System Programming
[600] Extension Group Assignment
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Picking up a Call
Ringing at Another Extension
(Call Pickup)”
Hello.
Sorry, Mr. Smith is out of the office.
He’s not in.
I’ll answer it.
Call Splitting
Allows an extension user to talk to 2 different parties. If a call is received while the user is already on the line, the user can place the current call on hold and have a conversation with the other party.
!
!
☞
• This feature is not possible for a doorphone call, page or 5-party conference.
• Related Feature References
Conference (5-party), Doorphone Call, Paging
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Splitting”
3-17
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 18
C
3 Features
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line
Allows an extension user enabled in program [606] to transfer a received intercom call to an external party.
!
!
☞
• A single line telephone user cannot transfer a received call to an external party.
• To join the conversation again after transferring the call, press the corresponding line key.
A conference call will be established. This feature is not available for a single line telephone.
• Required System Programming
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line
• Related Feature Reference
Hold, Limited Call Duration
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Exchange Line (Call Transfer – to
Exchange Line)”
Call Transfer – to Extension
Allows an extension user to transfer a received call, an intercom or an outside call, to another extension. Two types are available.
Screened Call Transfer: Announces the call to another extension before completing the transfer.
Unscreened Call Transfer:Immediately releases the call to another extension without an announcement.
!
!
• If the destination extension does not answer the call within the assigned time in program
[201], the call will return to the transferring party.
• An outside call can be transferred to an extension by simply pressing a DSS button. It requires program [005].
• If Music on Hold is enabled, music is sent to the original external caller while being transferred. Sending a cyclic tone or music on hold can be programmed by program
[111].
• During a 5-party conference, the user cannot transfer a call.
☞
• Required System Programming
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
• Related Feature References
Conference (5-party), Hold, Music on Hold
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During Conversation, “Transferring a Call to an Extension (Call Transfer – to
Extension)”
3-18
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 19
3 Features
C
Call Waiting
During a conversation, a Call Waiting tone informs an extension user that there is a call waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the first call or placing it on hold. When Call Waiting is enabled, a Call Waiting tone is sent to the user under the following conditions.
1) When an outside call (except a doorphone call) is received, or
2) When another extension executes the Busy
Extension Signalling feature.
I’ve got another call.
Please hold.
CALL WAITING TONE
!
!
• For proprietary telephone users, a Call Waiting tone (Tone 1 or Tone 2) can be selected in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. Tone 2 depends on System Programming. Program
[423] is for outside calls and program [115] is for intercom calls.
15 s
Tone 1
5 s
Tone 2
Single:
Double:
Triple:
☞
• Required System Programming
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Hold
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customising Your Telephone Functions”, Call Waiting Tone Selection
1.5 During Conversation, “Call Waiting”
Features
3-19
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 20
C
3 Features
Conference (3-party)
During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to make a 3-party conference. The maximum number of members of a conference can be programmed in program [116].
!
!
• The possible combinations, through System Programming, are 3 extensions, 1 extension and 2 external parties, or 2 extensions and 1 external party.
• When a 2-party call is changed to a 3-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone is sent to all 3 parties. The tone can be disabled by program [105].
• A 3-party call can also be established by the Executive Busy Override feature.
☞
• Required System Programming
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line
• Related Feature References
Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
CONF (Conference) Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (3-party)”
3-20
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 21
3 Features
C-D
Conference (5-party)
Allows an extension user to establish a 5-party conference when “5 party C-2 E-5” is selected in program [116].
!
!
• Up to 2 external parties can participate in a conference call.
• All 5 parties can be extensions.
• Only one 5-party conference can be established at one time.
• When a 5-party conference is established, a confirmation tone is sent to all parties. The tone can be disabled by program [105].
• The Executive Busy Override and the Call Park features are not available during a 5-party conference.
☞
• Required System Programming
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
• Related Feature References
Conference (3-party), Call Park, Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
CONF (Conference) Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Conference (5-party)”
Data Line Security
Prevents an extension user from being interrupted by the Call Waiting and Executive Busy
Override features. This feature also prevents a ring tone or an alarm tone from being sent when a call is kept waiting longer than a pre-determined time. Data communication devices, such as computers and facsimiles, connected to an extension port can operate without interruptions.
☞
• Related Feature References
Call Waiting, Executive Busy Override
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Data Line Security”
Features
3-21
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 22
D
3
Date and Time Setting
A manager or operator can adjust the current time.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Date and Time Setting”
Features
Direct In Line (DIL)
Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to a specified extension. This exchange line can be used by multiple extension users to make a call, but can only be used by one extension to receive a call. DIL can have a different destination in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
!
!
• If the destination extension is in an extension group which has enabled the Extension Hunting feature in program [100] “Hunting
Group Set”, Extension Hunting (Terminate or Circular in program
[101] “Hunting Type”) works when the extension is busy.
☞
• Required System Programming
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Extension Hunting, Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
1
4
7 8
0
2
5
3
6
9
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Allows an outside caller to access specific system features as if the caller is an extension in the system. The caller can have direct access to features such as:
• Placing an incoming call to an extension, extension group or operator. The caller also has the option of dialling the route for an extension using a 1 digit number (DISA builtin auto attendant number) via DISA calls.
The DISA feature operates without an optional card installed. If an outgoing message
(OGM) which greets a caller and gives information, or fax detection is required, an optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card must be installed. The system can detect a FAX (CNG) tone according to program [514]. An OGM can be programmed in program [502] (
☞ “Outgoing
Message (OGM)” in this section). When a caller reaches a DISA line, a message will greet the caller. Two different DISA messages can be recorded by the operator or manager. For example, one message can be used in day mode and the other in night mode, or they can be used for different exchange lines. If an optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is not installed, the caller will hear a short beep instead of the OGM (Internal DISA).
3-22
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 23
3
☞
!
!
Features
D
• “DISA1” or “DISA 2” must be assigned to exchange line(s) as the exchange line mode in programs [414] through [416].
• After the DISA Delayed Answer Time assigned in program [504] expires and a ringback tone is returned to the caller, a DISA call will be answered. The caller can dial during the message or after the tone.
• This system can store up to 10 programmable DISA built-in auto attendant numbers in program [501]. Each number is 1 digit.
• The DISA built-in auto attendant number may be the same as the first digit of other numbers (extension number, etc.). To avoid confusion, the system waits for the second digit for a preprogrammed amount of time in program [517] (default: 2 seconds). If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number.
• Only one OGM/FAX Detection Card can be installed .
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
To enable the DISA feature
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
To set DISA timer values
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM
To enable the Intercept Routing feature
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
• Related Feature References
Extension Hunting,
Intercept Routing, Outgoing Message (OGM)
Features
3-23
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 24
D
DISA Operation
Calling an extension by following the outgoing message
from an External Party
3
DISA phone no.
extension no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
Ringback tone and
DISA outgoing message
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
Features
Calling an extension without an outgoing message (Internal DISA)
from an External Party
DISA phone no.
Enter the DISA phone number.
extension no.
Ringback tone and one short beep
Enter the extension number.
Ring back tone
• You can dial the AA number* instead.
AA number*: A DISA built-in auto attendant number assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto
Attendant”.
3-24
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 25
3 Features
D
Flow chart of possible cases and results for DISA calls
An exchange line call is made.
*1
The caller reaches the DISA line.
With optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card
Without optional
OGM/FAX Detection Card
(Internal DISA)
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
One short beep
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
*2
*3
C
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
OGM
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@@@@@@@
@@
@@
@@ *11
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@
*12
Cyclic tone,
CPC signal
A number is dialled.
*4
*13
Nothing is dialled.
Disconnect
Is Intercept Routing employed?
Yes
*14
No
The call reaches the destination.
*5
Answered.
The call is not answered.
B
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*6
The destination extension(s) is(are) busy.
*7
What is the DISA
Busy Mode?
*8
Yes
No
The call is sent to another extension.
Disconnect
Busy tone
The call is sent to another extension.
*15
Call Waiting
Answered.
A
Disconnect.
The call is not answered.
Disconnect.
DISA2
Goes to A
Disconnect.
*9
The other
OGM is heard.
Answered.
Goes to
C
*10
The call is not answered.
FAX
Busy tone
( CNG) tone
The call is sent to the fax extension.
*16
Answered.
The call is not answered for
40 seconds.
Disconnect.
Goes to B
Note: The explanation for *1 through *16 is on the next page.
Features
3-25
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 26
D
3 Features
*1: The DISA Delayed timer starts. This is the time between a call reaching the system and being received. The time is assigned in program [504].
*2: When the assigned time period in program [519] expires, the system sends a short beep to the caller.
*3: The Intercept Timer for Internal DISA starts. This is the time the system waits for the number sent by the caller. If nothing is entered by the caller during this time, the system will regard it as
“Nothing is dialled.” The time is assigned in program [515].
*4: The system can accept the following numbers:
• 200 through 299 as an extension number.
• 0 or 9 as the operator call number when the operator is assigned in program
[008] “Operator Assignment” and “Without AA” is assigned in program [500]. Even if “With
AA” is assigned, 0 or 9 is regarded as the operator call number if nothing is assigned to “0” or
“9” in program [501].
• 0 through 9 as a built-in auto attendant number when “With AA” is assigned in program [500].
The DISA AA Wait timer starts after receiving the first 1-digit number. If the timer expires, the system will assume that the first digit is an AA number. The time is assigned in program [517].
*5: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [508].
*6: The system treats the call according to program [507] as follows.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch”.
If the call is still not answered within the time programmed in [509], it will be disconnected.
*7: If the destination extension belongs to a hunting group and all extensions in the group are busy, the system will check the DISA Busy Mode. If the destination is a DISA ring group, the DISA
Busy Mode will not work for the call. The system regards the call as unanswered.
*8: The DISA Busy Mode is selected in program [506]. There are 3 modes as follows.
• Disconnect – the caller hears a busy tone and a call is disconnected.
• Call Waiting – the destination extension hears a call waiting tone if they have enabled Call
Waiting.
• DISA2 – if “MODE2” is assigned in program [502] and a message is recorded in OGM2, the caller will hear the message and the system waits for the new destination.
3-26
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 27
3 Features
D
*9: The DISA Ring Timer Before Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [508].
*10: In this case, the system does not accept a line access code. If nothing is recorded in OGM2 or
OGM2 is used for another caller, the caller will hear a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
*11: The OGM is sent to the caller according to programs [414]–[416] and [502] when the assigned time in program [519] expires. If an OGM is not recorded, the DISA Wait Timer After OGM programmed in [505] starts immediately.
When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone while the OGM is being sent, the call is sent to the
FAX extension assigned in program [503]. When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.
*12: The DISA Wait Timer After OGM starts. The system waits for a number from the caller during the time assigned in program [505]. When the system detects a FAX (CNG) tone during the programmed time, the call is sent to the FAX extension. When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal during the programmed time, the call is disconnected.
*13: After the DISA Wait Timer After OGM or the Intercept Timer for Internal DISA expires, the system regards that nothing was dialled.
*14: The system treats the call according to program [510] as follows.
• Disconnect – the call is disconnected.
• Intercept – the call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410]. If all extensions are assigned to “Disable”, the call will be disconnected.
*15: The DISA Ring Timer After Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in [509]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
*16: The FAX extension assigned in program [503] receives the call. When the extension is busy, the system sends a busy tone to the sending FAX. If the call is not answered after 40 seconds, the call will be disconnected.
Program [514] sets how many times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected before the system recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data.
Features
3-27
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 28
D
3 Features
Display Contrast Adjustment
(KX-T7130 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast with the
CONTRAST selector.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Display Contrast Adjustment”
Distinctive Dial Tones
An extension user will hear 3 types of dial tone patterns which give information about the features activated on the telephone.
Dial Tone 1: This is a normal dial tone. None of the features listed in Dial Tone 2 are activated.
1 s
Dial Tone 2: Sent when any of the following features are set.
• Absent Message Capability • Background Music (BGM)
• Call Forwarding
• Data Line Security
(for proprietary telephones only)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Electronic Extension Lockout • Message Waiting
(for proprietary telephones only)
• Remote Extension Lock Control • Pickup Dialling
(for single line telephones only)
• Timed Reminder
1 s
Dial Tone 3: Sent when making an Account Code Entry and answering a Timed
Reminder call. Also sent when going off-hook with a single line telephone which has a message in a Voice Processing System.
1 s
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Distinctive Dial Tones”
3-28
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 29
3 Features
D
Do Not Disturb (DND)
<Do Not Disturb (DND)>
Allows an extension user to prevent other parties from disturbing them. The extension will not receive intercom or outside calls.
<Do Not Disturb (DND) Override>
Allows an extension user enabled in program [609] to call an extension which has set the Do
Not Disturb (DND) feature.
!
!
• If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND button, it can be assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
• DND does not work for the following calls: Hold recall or Timed Reminder.
• A PT user in the DND mode can answer a call by pressing the corresponding flashing button.
• If the Call Forwarding feature has already been set, setting the DND feature will cancel
Call Forwarding.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding,
Timed Reminder
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customising the Buttons on
Your Telephone”,
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb) Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Rejecting Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb — DND)”
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling an Extension which Denies Receiving Calls
(Do Not Disturb Override)”
DND TONE
Features
3-29
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 30
D
3 Features
Door Opener
Up to 4 Door Openers can be connected to the system. The door can be unlocked by a preassigned extension users in programs [703]-[705].
Could you please open the door?
Panasonic
Just a moment please.
!
!
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a usersupplied door opener to the door to be opened. Four openers can be installed.
• The door opener will open the door even if a doorphone is not installed.
• The door opener timer can be modified in program [709].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
• Required System Programming
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature Reference
Doorphone Call
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Door Opener”
Doorphone Call
!
!
Up to 4 Doorphones (KX-T30865) can be installed. If a visitor presses the doorphone button, a pre-assigned extension user in programs [700]-[702] can answer the call and talk to the visitor. Any extension user can call a doorphone. The doorphones are also used for the
Room Monitor feature.
• An optional Doorphone/Door Opener Card must be installed to the system and a doorphone. Four doorphones can be installed.
• Doorphone 1 and 2 cannot be used simultaneously. When one is in use, an extension user cannot have a conversation with the other. Doorphone 3 and 4 are the same.
• An access tone can be programmed in [707] to be sent to a monitored doorphone before room monitoring starts.
• The ring tone from the doorphone call is programmable in [706].
3-30
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 31
3 Features
☞
• Connection Reference
2.16 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
• Required System Programming
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
• Related Feature References
Door Opener, Room Monitor
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”
1.7 Useful Features, “Doorphone Call”
D
DSS Console
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access to extensions, a busy lamp display, as well as 16 PF (Programmable Feature) buttons.
The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone (PT). The port number of the DSS Console and its associated PT are assigned in programs [003] and [004].
Up to 2 consoles can be installed per system.
If a feature like One-Touch Dialling is assigned to a DSS button or PF button, accessing the feature can be done easily by pressing the corresponding button. This is very useful for an operator or manager. Refer to the Operating Instructions for more details.
!
!
• Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone.
• Indicating the Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND) status of corresponding extensions using a DSS button indication is programmable in [112].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.8 Extension Connection
• Required System Programming
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.9 DSS Console Features
Features
3-31
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 32
E
3 Features
Emergency Call
Allows an extension user to access a pre-assigned emergency number which can be dialled regardless of any restrictions.
!
!
• Up to 5 emergency numbers can be stored.
• An emergency call is allowed even in the following cases;
— in Account Code Modes (Verify–All and Forced modes),
— in any call barring COS number, and
— in Electronic Extension Lockout.
☞
• Required System Programming
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
• Related Feature References
Account Code Entry, Call Barring, Extension Lock
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Making Emergency Calls (Emergency Call)”
Exchange Line Ringing Selection
When an outside call is received at an extension, the user can select whether their extension will ring or not.
!
!
☞
• Select “Enable” in programs [408]–[410].
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,
Exchange Line Ringing Selection
3-32
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 33
3 Features
E
Executive Busy Override
<Executive Busy Override – Extension>
Allows an extension user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing intercom call. A
3-party conference will be established.
<Executive Busy Override – Exchange Line>
Allows a proprietary telephone user enabled in program [608] to interrupt an existing outside call or add a third party. A 3-party conference will be established.
<Executive Busy Override Deny>
Allows an extension user to prevent other extension users from interrupting their conversation.
!
!
• The Executive Busy Override feature will not work if the extension engaged the conversation has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a 3-party call is changed to a 2-party call or vice versa, a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties. This tone can be disabled by program [105].
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature Reference
Conference (3-party)
• Operating Instructions References
1.3 Making Calls, “Interrupting an Existing Call (Executive Busy Override)”
1.3 Making Calls, “Denying ‘Interrupting an Existing Call’
(Executive Busy Override Deny)”
Extension Button Confirmation
(KX-T7130 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm the values stored in the buttons, such as the REDIAL button or flexible line key, by pressing the corresponding button while on-hook.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features “Extension Button Confirmation (KX-T7130 only)”
Features
3-33
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 34
E
3 Features
Extension Feature Clear
Allows an extension user to reset the following extension features to the default settings.
• Absent Message Capability
• Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
• Background Music (BGM)
• Call Forwarding
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• Data Line Security
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Log-In/Log-Out
• Message Waiting – (All messages will be erased.)
• Pickup Dialling – (The stored telephone number will be erased.)
• Paging Deny
• Room Monitor
• Timed Reminder
• Voice Mail Integration
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Cancelling the Feature Settings (Extension Feature Clear)”
3-34
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 35
3 Features
E
Extension Group
The system supports 8 extension groups. In an extension group, the following features can be activated.
• Group Call Pickup: Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another member in the same group.
• Paging – Group: Any member of an extension group can make a voice announcement to another group member.
A hunting group, DISA ring group or UCD group is a specific extension group. The following operation as well as the features above can be activated for a hunting group, DISA ring group or UCD group.
Hunting Group
An extension group enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” will perform the
Extension Hunting feature. See “Extension Hunting” in this section.
DISA Ring Group
All extensions in a DISA ring group assigned as an auto attendant destination in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant” will ring simultaneously. Selecting
“DISA1” or “DISA2” in programs [414]–[416] “Exchange Line Mode —
Day/Night/Lunch” is required. Also, you must select “With AA” in program [500]
“DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection”.
UCD Group
One extension group assigned as the UCD group in program [520] “UCD Group” can be the destination of incoming outside calls via the UCD feature. Selecting “UCD” in programs [414]–[416] “Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch” is required.
☞
• Required System Program Address
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Pickup, Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Extension Hunting,
Paging, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Features
3-35
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 36
E
3 Features
Extension Hunting
If a called extension is busy, Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle extension in an extension group in numerical order. Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to programming. The following 2 hunting types are available.
Circular hunting:
The extensions are hunted one time in numerical order. If all extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard.
Terminate hunting:
The extensions are hunted until the extension which has the highest port number in the group is reached. If all higher order numbers are busy, the search will end and a busy tone will be heard.
!
!
☞
• One hunting type can be selected for each extension group.
• To leave the hunting group temporarily, use the Log-Out feature. To rejoin, use the
Log-In feature.
• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forwarding or Log-Out,
Extension Hunting will skip the extension. However, Extension Hunting will not skip the extension which receives the call first, even if it has set Do Not Disturb (DND) or Call
Forwarding.
Circular Hunting Terminate
• Required System Programming
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Extension Group
Log-In/Log-Out
Busy Tone
Extension Lock
<Electronic Extension Lockout>
Allows an extension user to lock their extension so that other users cannot make outside calls until it is unlocked. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension.
<Electronic Extension Lockout – CANCEL ALL>
The operator and manager can cancel Electronic Extension Lockout of all extensions at one time.
<Remote Extension Lock Control>
The operator and manager are given the privilege of controlling Electronic Extension
Lockout at any extension by using the DSS console. The operator and manager can see the status of each extension, locked or unlocked, by the pre-assigned DSS button LED on the
DSS console. For example, this feature is useful for a small hotel or motel when guests are checked out.
3-36
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 37
3 Features
!
!
• The Remote Extension Lock Control overrides the Electronic Extension Lockout. If the operator or manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it.
• A call barring class can be assigned to an extension which has set the Electronic
Extension Lockout and Remote Extension Lock Control features in program [312] “Call
Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class”. Certain types of outgoing outside calls are allowed depending on the assigned call barring class.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Locking Your Telephone (Electronic Extension
Lockout)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Electronic Extension Lockout – CANCEL
ALL”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Remote Extension Lock”
1.9 DSS Console Features “Initial Settings”, Extension Lock Button Assignment
(Operator/Manager only)
E
Extension Password / System Password
The extension password assigned by the manager (extension port 01) to each extension can be used for the Walking COS feature.
The system password is used for entering System Programming and also before assigning the extension password.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature References
Walking COS
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”
Features
3-37
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 38
E
3 Features
External Feature Access
Allows an extension user to access special features (e.g. Call Waiting) offered by the Local
Exchange or host PBX. This is done by placing the current call on hold and sending a recall signal using either the RECALL button or the feature number. This feature is effective only during an outside call.
!
!
• When “MODE2” is selected in program [110] and the RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in [418], this feature will not work.
• The recall time must be assigned in program [418] as required by the host PBX or exchange line.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature References
Host PBX Access, Recall
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”
3-38
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 39
3 Features
F
Flexible Buttons
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can change the flexible buttons on the telephone and DSS console to certain function buttons. For example, if the telephone has more line keys than available exchange lines, the unused line keys may be changed to One-Touch Dialling buttons, etc.
The 4 types of flexible buttons are as follows:
• Flexible line keys (located on a PT only)
• Flexible DSS Buttons (located on a DSS Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) Buttons (located on a PT and DSS Console)
• Flexible MESSAGE Buttons
Check the required operation first. If the telephone is not provided with the button, assigning the button can be performed in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
Function
Programmable Button
DSS PF
✔
MESSAGE
✔
✔ ✔ ✔
DSS (Direct Station Selection)
One-Touch Dialling
CONF (Conference)
FWD/DND (Forward/Do Not Disturb)
SAVE
Log-In/Log-Out
Single Exchange Line (S-CO)
Other Exchange Line (O-CO)
Trunk Group (G-CO)
MESSAGE (Message Waiting)
Day
Night
Lunch
Extension Lock
LINE
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
☞
“
✔
” indicates that the feature is available.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”
Features
3-39
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 40
H
3 Features
Handsfree Answerback
Allows a proprietary telephone with a speakerphone to answer an intercom call without lifting the handset. This feature performed by pressing the AUTO ANSWER/MUTE button.
!
!
☞
• This feature does not work for incoming outside calls or doorphone calls.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Handsfree Answerback”
Handsfree Operation
Allows a proprietary telephone user to dial and talk to the other party without lifting the handset. Pressing one of the following buttons activates the handsfree mode when the
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button, MONITOR button, INTERCOM button, or line key.
!
!
☞
• The KX-T7050 can perform handsfree dialling operations, etc., but cannot have a handsfree conversation.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Handsfree Operation”
Hold
<Call Hold>
Allows an extension user to place an intercom and/or outside call on hold. The held call can be retrieved by the user who held it, or by any other extension (Call Hold Retrieve).
With a single line telephone (SLT), either one outside or intercom call can be held at one time. If an SLT user wants to hold both calls, use the Call Park feature. An SLT user can select how to operate the Call Hold feature by program [104].
<Exclusive Hold>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to prevent other extension users from retrieving their held call. Only the user who held the call can retrieve it. This feature is not available for an
SLT.
3-40
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 41
3 Features
H
!
!
• Only one intercom call can be placed on hold. For a proprietary telephone, outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time.
• If a held call is not retrieved within the assigned time in program [200], the extension user who held it will hear a ring tone or an alarm tone. If the user is on-hook and their
SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off, the phone will ring (Hold Recall). If the user is off-hook or in the handsfree mode, an alarm tone will be sent to the built-in speaker of a proprietary telephone or the handset receiver of a single line telephone at
15-second intervals (Hold Alarm). If “Disable” is selected in program [200], nothing will be heard.
• If a held outside call is not answered within thirty minutes, it will be automatically disconnected.
• For outside calls, music is sent to the external party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• During a 5-party conference, the Hold feature cannot be activated.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature References
Call Park, Music on Hold/Background Music (BGM),
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone
• Operating Instructions References
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold (Call Hold)”
1.5 During a Conversation, “Placing a Call on Hold Exclusively (Exclusive Hold)”
1.5 During a Conversation, “Retrieving a Call on Hold (Call Hold Retrieve)”
Host PBX Access
The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting a line from the host to an exchange line in the system.
!
!
• A Host PBX Access code assigned in program [403] is required to access an exchange line of the host PBX.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External Feature Access).
☞
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature Reference
External Feature Access
To Central Office
Host PBX
Features
3-41
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 42
I
3 Features
Intercept Routing
Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls via the DISA or UCD feature. The
Intercept Routing feature works in the following 2 cases.
1) When nothing is dialled after a dial tone or OGM is sent to the caller. (The DISA feature only)
2) When the call is not answered within a programmed time. This is called Intercept
Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
☞
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Intercom Calling
Allows an extension user to make a call to another extension.
!
!
• An extension number and a name can be assigned in programs [009] and [604]. If assigned, they will be shown on the display proprietary telephone during an intercom call.
• The DSS buttons permit a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to an extension.
The DSS function can be assigned to a flexible line key in the Proprietary Telephone
Settings.
The DSS buttons on the DSS console can also be used.
• An extension user can press the DSS buttons directly to make an intercom call without going off-hook. This can be enabled by program [126].
☞
• Required System Programming
[009] Extension Number Assignment
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
1.3 Making Calls, “Intercom Calling”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Extension Number Assignment
3-42
Features
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 43
3 Features
Language Selection
The selected language in program [615] is shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings, but not used during System
Programming. The selected language in program [806] is used for an SMDR printout.
☞
• Required System Programming
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
L
Limited Call Duration
The system disconnects outside outgoing calls when a specific timer expires. The timer is in effect when making an outside call, transferring an intercom call to an exchange line or forwarding an intercom call to an exchange line. Limiting the time of the call can be assigned through System Programming.
!
!
☞
• An alarm tone will be sent to both parties 15 seconds before the assigned time limit.
• Required System Programming
[212] Exchange line Duration Time Limit
[613] Exchange line Duration Time Limit Selection
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding, Call Transfer – to Exchange line
Line Access Keys
A proprietary telephone (PT) user must assign one of the following 3 types of line keys to flexible line keys in the Proprietary Telephone Settings. This permits making or receiving outside calls. The default setting for the flexible line keys (CO 1 – CO 6) are Single
Exchange Line (S-CO) keys. CO 1 corresponds to exchange line 1, CO 2 corresponds to exchange line 2, etc.
<Trunk Group (G-CO) Key>
Receiving or making outside calls is on an trunk group basis. The trunk group is assigned in program [404]. Any incoming call from any exchange line in the trunk group arrives at the
G-CO key. To make an outside call, the user can access an idle exchange line in the group by simply pressing the assigned G-CO key.
<Single Exchange Line (S-CO) Key>
Receiving or making outside calls is done using a specific exchange line. An incoming call from the specific exchange line arrives at the S-CO key. To make an outside call, the user can access the specific exchange line by simply pressing the assigned S-CO key.
<Other Exchange Line (O-CO) Key>
Exchange lines, which are not assigned to an S-CO or G-CO key, can be assigned to a flexible line key as the O-CO key. An incoming call on an exchange lines arrives at the
O-CO. To make an outside call, the user simply presses the assigned O-CO key.
Features
3-43
PSQX1708ZA-04E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 44
L
3 Features
!
!
• The same trunk group can be assigned to more than one G-CO key on the same PT.
• The same line can be assigned to an S-CO key and G-CO key. The
S-CO key has priority.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming calls (disable) can be selected by programs [408] through [413] on an extension-exchange line basis.
• A ringing pattern can be selected for each exchange line by program [423].
☞
• Required System Programming
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection
• Related Feature References
Outside Calling, Receiving Calls, Ringing Pattern Selection
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Keys
Log-In/Log-Out
Allows an extension user to Log-In (join) or Log-Out (leave) a hunting, DISA ring or UCD group temporarily. Extensions in the log-out mode will not receive calls by Extension
Hunting, DISA or UCD but will receive other calls, not like the Do Not Disturb (DND) feature. The Log-In/Log-Out button can be assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary
Telephone Settings. The lighting patterns of the Log-In/Log-Out button on a proprietary telephone and status are as follows.
Off: Log-In mode
Log-In
Red: Log-Out mode
!
!
☞
• There should be at least one extension that is in the
Log-In mode in a group.
UCD Group
Hunting Group
DISA Ring Group
Log-Out
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Extension Group,
Extension Hunting, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Log-In/Log-Out Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Joining or Leaving a Call Distribution Group (Log-In/Log-Out)”
3-44
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 45
3 Features
M
Message Waiting
Allows an extension user to notify the called extension of a message waiting when the called extension is busy or does not answer the call. Only a proprietary telephone user with a
MESSAGE button can know there is a message waiting if the LED on the MESSAGE button lights red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button will reply to the message by calling the extension which left the message. The messages which are stored in the mailbox of the
Voice Processing System can also be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button (Voice Mail Integration).
!
!
• Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension sending it or from the extension receiving it.
• Each extension can have a maximum of 8 simultaneous messages.
• Messages are always left at the original extension. They cannot be sent to a Call
Forwarding or Extension Hunting destination.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Restoring the MESSAGE button
1.7 Useful Features, “Leaving a Message Notification (Message Waiting)”
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100”
Microphone Mute
Allows a proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy.
!
!
☞
• The user’s voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During a Conversation, “Turning off the Microphone (Microphone Mute)”
Features
3-45
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 46
M-O
3 Features
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
While an external party is on hold, music is automatically generated.
!
!
• Operations such as Call Hold and Call Transfer activate Music on Hold.
• A user-supplied external music source, such as a radio, must be connected to the system when “External” is selected in program [111]. One external music source can be connected to the system. The music source is used for Music on Hold and/or BGM.
• When “Tone” is selected in program [111], the cyclic tone is used only for Music on
Hold and the external music source is used for BGM.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.10 External Music Connection
• Required System Programming
• Related Feature References
Hold, Call Transfer – to Exchange line, Call Transfer – to Extension,
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Turning on the Background Music (BGM)”
One-Touch Dialling
Allows a proprietary telephone user one-touch access to a desired party or system feature.
This is done by storing an extension number, telephone number or a feature number (up to
24 digits) in a One-Touch Dialling button. One-Touch Dialling buttons can be assigned to flexible buttons in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
!
!
☞
• An account code can be stored into a One-Touch Dialling button.
• A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in
2 One-Touch Dialling buttons.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”
One-Touch Dialling button
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialling by Simply Pressing a Button (One-Touch Dialling)”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Dialling”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “One-Touch Access for System Features”
3-46
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 47
3 Features
O
Operator / Manager Extension
The system supports one operator. Any extension can be designated as an operator in program [008]. Extension port 01 is the system manager extension. The extension assigned as an operator or manager has the ability to perform the following operations.
• Setting the Date and Time
• Cancelling the Electronic Extension Lockout
• Setting/Cancelling the Remote Extension Lock
• Setting/Cancelling/Confirming the Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Remotely
• Recording and Playing the Outgoing Message
• Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Mode
The manager extension can also perform System Programming and the following operation.
• Setting the Extension Password
☞
• Required System Programming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features
Operator Call
Allows an extension user to call an operator within the system by dialling the feature number assigned in program [121]. One extension can be assigned as the operator in program [008].
!
!
• If an operator is not assigned, this feature is not available and a reorder tone will be heard.
• Every extension user can reach the operator just by dialling the operator call number (0 or
9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection”.
☞
• Required System Programming
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Calling an Operator (Operator Call)”
Features
3-47
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 48
O
3 Features
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Allows the extension assigned as an operator or manager to record up to 2 outgoing voice messages (maximum 30 seconds each). This message is played when a caller accesses the
DISA or UCD feature. An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the
OGM.
The following are some examples of OGM and flow chart.
Case 1: Receives 2 calls at a time – OGM for DISA.
(Do not want customers to be kept waiting.)
System
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
Outside Call
To the designated destination
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
Outside Call
To the designated destination
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: Same as OGM 1
Required Settings: [502] “MODE1”
[414]-[416] “DISA1”
Case 2: Uses the OGM in the day, night and lunch modes – OGM for DISA.
(In the day mode) System
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
Outside Call
To the designated destination
(In the night mode) System
Outside Call
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
The call is disconnected by assigning
“Disconnect” for DISA2 in program
[510] “DISA No Dial Mode”.
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “We are sorry but our office is closed for the day.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for OGM1, “DISA2” for OGM2
3-48
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 49
3 Features
O
Case 3: Uses a different OGM for exchange lines – OGM for DISA.
System
(Exchange line 1)
Outside Call
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
(Exchange line 2)
Outside Call
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “This is B company. To contact Mr. A, press 101. To contact Mr. B, press
102.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for the A company exchange line(s).
“DISA2” for the B company exchange line(s).
Case 4: Uses a different OGM when the line is busy – OGM for DISA.
System
OGM1
DISA with
OGM
To the designated destination
Outside Call
The line is busy.
DISA with
OGM
(If the operator is selected.)
To the Operator
OGM2
OGM1: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. If you want to call the operator, press 0.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE2”
[414]-[416] “DISA1”
[506] “DISA2”
Case 5: Distributes calls to the UCD group – OGM for UCD.
System
Outside Call
The line is busy.
OGM1
UCD with
OGM
(When the line is free.)
Outside Call
The line is busy.
OGM2
UCD with
OGM
(When the line is free.)
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”
OGM2: Same as OGM1
Required Settings: [502] “MODE3”
[414]-[416] “UCD”
To the UCD group
Features
3-49
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 50
O
3 Features
Case 6: Disconnects a call after the OGM – OGM for UCD.
System
UCD with
OGM
Outside Call
OGM1
The line is busy.
OGM2
The call is disconnected.
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please hold.”
OGM2: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy. Please call back later.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE4”
[414]-[416] “UCD”
Case 7: Uses the DISA or UCD feature for exchange lines
– OGM for DISA and UCD.
System
(UCD)
UCD with
OGM
Outside Call
The line is busy.
(When the line is free.)
OGM1
(DISA)
Outside Call
OGM2
DISA with
OGM
To the UCD group
To the designated destination
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy Please hold.” (UCD message)
OGM2: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.” (DISA message)
Required Settings: [502] “MODE5”
[414]-[416] “DISA1” for exchange line(s) which use the DISA feature
“UCD” for exchange line(s) which use the UCD feature
Case 8: Uses the DISA feature when none of the extension in the UCD group can answer a call – OGM for UCD.
System
UCD with
OGM
Outside Call
OGM1
The line is busy.
OGM2
The call is sent to the DISA feature.
OGM1: “We are sorry. The line is currently busy Please hold.”
OGM2: “This is A company. For the sales division, press 1. For the service division, press 2. To call the operator, press 0.”
Required Settings: [502] “MODE6”
[414]-[416] “UCD”
[523] “Intercept”
3-50
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 51
3 Features
!
!
☞
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to program the OGM.
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Outgoing Message (OGM)”
O
Features
3-51
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 52
O
3 Features
Outside Calling
Allows an extension user to make a call to an external party by using one of the following line access methods.
<Automatic Line Access>
Allows an extension user to select an available exchange line automatically from the assigned lines in program [419] by pressing the Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9). For a proprietary telephone, a Line Access Key assignment (S-CO, G-CO, O-CO) in the
Proprietary Telephone Settings is required. If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
<Individual Line Access>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to select the desired exchange line by pressing the line key assigned as the S-CO key. A Line Access Key assignment (S-CO) is required before use.
<Trunk Group Access>
Allows an extension user to select an idle line within a designated trunk group. A trunk group is assigned in program [404]. To specify a trunk group, dial the feature number “8” and the desired trunk group number (1 through 6). A proprietary telephone user can also specify a trunk group by pressing a G-CO key. A Line Access Key assignment (G-CO) is required before use. If Idle Line Preference is set on the telephone in the Proprietary
Telephone Settings, the user can access an idle line only by going off-hook.
!
!
• Each extension requires System Programming to access exchange lines.
• After an exchange line is seized, the system waits for the assigned time in program [206] before dialling.
☞
• Required System Programming
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access
• Related Feature References
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing, Line Access Keys
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Keys
1.3 Making Calls, “Outside Calling”
3-52
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 53
3 Features
P
Paging
Allows an extension user to make a voice announcement to several people at the same time.
The message is announced over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and/or the external pager. The paged person can answer the page (Answering a Page) from any extension within the system. The following types are available.
All Extensions: Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones.
Group: Makes a voice announcement to the designated extension group over the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones. An extension group is assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment”.
External: Makes a voice announcement over the external pager.
All Extensions & : Makes a voice announcement to all extensions over the built-in
External
speakers of proprietary telephones and the external pager.
!
!
☞
• An extension user can also transfer a call after paging (Paging and Transfer). Also, pages can be denied (Paging Deny).
• An external pager (user-supplied) must be connected beforehand. One external pager can be connected to the system.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the extensions before the voice announcement or answering.
• A confirmation tone is sent to the external pager before the voice announcement. The tone to the external pager can be disabled in program [106].
• An extension which has set the Do Not Disturb (DND) or Paging Deny feature, or is in use cannot be paged.
• Connection Reference
2.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
• Required System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
• Related Feature References
Extension Group, Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.5 During a Conversation, “Paging”
Features
3-53
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 54
P
3 Features
Parallelled Telephone Connection
Any analogue proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line telephone, facsimile and data terminal.
!
!
☞
• System Programming is required.
• Connection Reference
2.11 Parallelled Telephone Connection
• Required System Programming
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection
• Related Feature Reference
Power Failure Transfer
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Parallel Connection of a Proprietary Telephone and Single Line
Telephone (Parallelled Telephone Connection)”
Personal Speed Dialling
Allows an extension user to store up to 10 speed dialling numbers (0 through 9) with a maximum of 24 digits per number. An extension number, telephone number or feature number can be stored. For example, storing extension numbers for each room in a house can be useful. (1 = Living Room, 2 = Kitchen, etc.) To make a call, dial # and the number.
!
!
• Proprietary telephone users cannot use this feature if One-Touch Dialling buttons are assigned to PF buttons. If the user assign a personal speed dialling number, the number stored in the One-Touch Dialling button will be overwritten and vice versa. PF Buttons
F1 through F10 correspond to the speed dialling numbers as follows.
F1 — 0
F2 — 1
F3 — 2
F4 — 3
F6 — 5
F7 — 6
F8 — 7
F9 — 8
F5 — 4 F10 — 9
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.3 Making Call, “Dialling with Personal Speed Dialling (Personal Speed Dialling)”
3-54
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 55
3 Features
P
Pickup Dialling
Allows a single line telephone user to make an outgoing call by going off-hook, if the user has stored the telephone number (up to 32 digits) beforehand. This feature is also known as
Hot Line.
!
!
• A rotary telephone cannot program this feature.
• The user can set and cancel this feature.
• If the feature is activated and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone will be generated for the delay time assigned in program [203] and then dialling will start. During the delay time, the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialling function.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Call, “Dialling by Simply Going Off-Hook (Pickup Dialling)”
Polarity Reverse Detection
The circuit in the system can detect an exchange line polarity reverse signal from the Local
Exchange when trying to make an outside call. This detects the start (a called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside call. The conversation time can be verified on the SMDR printout using this feature.
When an outside call is received, the circuit can also detect the polarity reverse signal before ringing.
☞
• Required System Programming
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
• Related Feature Reference
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Features
3-55
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 56
P
3 Features
Power Failure Transfer
!
!
☞
During a power failure, specific extension telephones are automatically connected to specific exchange lines. This provides exchange line conversations between the following extensions and exchange lines.
Exchange line 1 : extension port 01
Exchange line 4 : extension port 09
A single line telephone (SLT) can work in case of a power failure. Connect an SLT to the above extension port. For more information, refer to the Operating Instructions.
• All other conversations, except the above combinations, are disconnected during a power failure.
• Only an exchange line can have a conversation. All other features do not work.
• We recommend connecting a single line telephone (SLT) in parallel at extension ports 01 and 09, so that an SLT can be used during a power failure.
• Connection Reference
2.18 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
• Related Feature Reference
Parallelled Telephone Connection
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Power Failure Transfer”
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
!
!
☞
A proprietary telephone user can select the method to answer incoming outside calls from the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone Settings are required.
No Line Preference: When an incoming call is received, the extension user must go off-hook and then press the flashing line key.
Prime Line Preference: When incoming calls are received at the same time, the user can receive the call on the preferred exchange line by only going off-hook.
Ringing Line Preference: When an incoming call is received, the user can receive the call ringing at their telephone by going off-hook.
• A single line telephone can only set “Ringing Line Preference”.
• Line access key(s) (Single Exchange Line, Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group) should be assigned to line key(s) beforehand.
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]–[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature Reference
Line Access Keys
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Keys
3-56
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 57
3 Features
P
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to make outside calls from the following 3 line preferences. System Programming and Proprietary Telephone
Settings are required.
Idle Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned lines in program [419].
Prime Line Preference: When the user goes off-hook, they are connected to the pre-assigned line. Assign one prime line beforehand.
No Line Preference: No line is selected when the user goes off-hook. They must select a line to make a call.
!
!
☞
• Line Access Key(s) (Single Exchange Line, Other Exchange Line or Trunk Group) should be assigned to the line key(s) beforehand.
• Required System Programming
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment
[405]–[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access
• Related Feature Reference
Line Access Keys
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,
Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Line Access Keys
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set
Allows a proprietary telephone user to reset the following Proprietary Telephone Settings to the default settings.
• Preferred Line Assignment — Outgoing
• Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
• Exchange Line Ringing Selection
• Intercom Alert Assignment
• Call Waiting Tone Selection
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising Your Telephone Functions”,
Proprietary Telephone Setting Data Default Set
Features
3-57
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 58
P-R
3 Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Allows an extension user to change the dialling mode from Pulse to Tone after entering a telephone number to access services, such as computer telephone services or Voice Mail, which require tones.
!
!
• This feature only works for exchange lines which have set “Pulse Mode” or ”Call
Blocking Mode” in program [401].
• Changing from Tone to Pulse is not possible.
☞
• Required System Programming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Pulse to Tone Conversion”
Recall
The RECALL button is used to allow a proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up. This is activated when “MODE2” is selected in program [110] and the RECALL button is pressed for longer than the time programmed in [418]. When “MODE1” is selected in program [110], the RECALL button can be used to access features of the Local Exchange or host PBX (External Feature Access).
It is performed by putting the current party on hold and sending a recall signal while having an outside call.
!
!
• Assigning the External Feature Access feature to any flexible button is useful when
“MODE 2” was selected in program [110]. This can be done from any extension by assigning the RECALL button to a One-Touch Dialling button (
☞ Operating Instructions,
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
One-Touch Access for System Features). When the assigned button is pressed, a recall signal is sent during the programmed time in [418].
☞
• Required System Program Address
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “External Feature Access”
3-58
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 59
3 Features
R
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone
Pressing the Recall button is used to allow a single line telephone user to hold a call for transferring or holding, if the recall time is within the assigned time in program [207]. The procedure to transfer a call or hold is determined in program [104] “Hold Mode Selection”.
Pressing the Recall button can be also used to disconnect a call, if the recall time is more than the assigned time in program [207].
!
!
• If “MODE 1” was selected in program [207], the system will recognise pressing the
Recall button as hooking, while a busy tone or reorder tone is sent or during a conversation. The system will recognise as 1 being dialled in the pulse mode, while a dial tone is sent. The system can refuse receiving a pulse signal by selecting “Disable” in program [614]. Therefore, even if the Recall button is pressed during a dial tone, the system will regard it as hooking.
☞
• Required System Programming
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
Receiving Calls
Allows an extension user to receive an intercom or outside call by going off-hook. A proprietary telephone user can also receive a call by pressing the rapid flashing CO or
INTERCOM button, and talk (handsfree mode) if the telephone has the SP-PHONE button.
!
!
☞
• A proprietary telephone user can select the Line Preference for incoming outside calls.
See “Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming” in this section.
• Required System Programming
[408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”
[411]–[413] “Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”
• Related Feature Reference
Preferred Line Assignment — Incoming
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.4 Receiving Calls, “Receiving Calls”
Features
3-59
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 60
R
3 Features
Redial
☞
<Last Number Redial>
Every extension automatically saves the last telephone number dialled so that the extension user can make a call to the same party later using a simple operation.
<Saved Number Redial>
Allows a proprietary telephone user to save the current external telephone number in the
SAVE button during a conversation, so that the extension user can redial the same party later using a simple operation. The saved number can be redialled until another number is stored.
A flexible button can be assigned as the SAVE button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
SAVE button
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialling the Last Number Dialled (Last Number Redial)”
1.3 Making Calls, “Redialling the Saved Number (Saved Number Redial)”
Ringing Pattern Selection
A ringing pattern can be selected depending on the type of call such as an outside call, intercom call and doorphone call. Available ringing patterns are as follows:
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
S-Double:
(Doorphone only)
!
!
• Private calls can be distinguished from business calls by assigning different ringing per exchange line. Moreover, by assigning different ringing, intercom calls and doorphone calls can be distinguished from other calls. Therefore, careful attention should be applied to all ringing assignments.
☞
• Required System Programming
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Exchange Line Ringing Selection
3-60
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 61
3 Features
Room Monitor
Allows a proprietary telephone or single line telephone with a MUTE button to monitor a room or the front door through another proprietary telephone or doorphone without them knowing. The access tone will not be sent to the monitored proprietary telephone when monitoring starts.
!
!
• The extensions that can be monitored must be programmed in [612] before operation is possible.
• If a doorphone is used as a room monitor, the access tone will be heard when monitoring starts as the default setting. The tone can be disabled in program [707].
• This feature is not available for KX-T7050.
• A single line telephone with a MUTE button can be used for monitoring, but cannot be monitored.
☞
• Required System Programming
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
• Related Feature Reference
Doorphone Call
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Room Monitor”
R
Features
3-61
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 62
S
3 Features
Secret Dialling
Allows a proprietary telephone user to conceal all or part(s) of a System Speed Dialling number assigned in program [001] or One-Touch Dialling number assigned to a flexible button in the Proprietary Telephone Settings which would normally appear on the display.
!
!
• When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the numbers to be concealed.
• One or more parts of a telephone number can be concealed.
• Printing out the concealed number on a SMDR can be assigned in program [803].
☞
• Required System Programming
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One-Touch Dialling Printing
• Related Feature References
One-Touch Dialling, System Speed Dialling
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
One-Touch Dialling Button
1.7 Useful Features, “Secret Dialling”
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
(KX-T7130 only)
Allows a display proprietary telephone user to confirm their port and extension number using a simple operation.
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Self-Extension Number Confirmation
(KX-T7130 only)”
3-62
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 63
3 Features
S
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically prints out detailed call information of outside calls. A printer connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls, as well as print a hard copy of System
Programming. To print out the record of System Programming items that have been assigned, use program [804] “System Data Dump”. To print the call records, use program
[802] “Incoming/ Outgoing Call Selection for Printing”, which prints out the following records.
• A record of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls
• A record of all incoming outside calls
An example of a printed call record:
Date Time Ext.
CO
31/12/98 12:52PM 203
31/12/98 12:53PM 203
31/12/98 *12:54PM 201
31/12/98 1:04PM 203
31/12/98 1:04PM 202
31/12/98 1:05PM 203
31/12/98 1:06PM 203
31/12/98 1:06PM 202
31/12/98 1:07PM 203
31/12/98 2:15PM 203
31/12/98 2:26PM 203
31/12/98 2:27PM 216
31/12/98 3:25PM
02
01
01
01
05
02
06
05
01
01
05
02
02
Dial number
12345678901234567890123456789012
<
< incoming incoming
092. . . 1438
>
>
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
9=0924567123
Duration Code
00:00'16 . . . .
00:01'43 . . . .
00:07'48 . . . .
00:00'06 4536
00:00'09 . . . .
00:00'08 . . . .
00:00'08 . . . .
00:00'17 . . . .
00:11'00 . . 13
00:11'00 . 201
00:03'00 . . . .
00:13'55 . . . .
00:11'48 . . . .
Example of the SMDR printout format:
Explanation
(1) Date : shows the date of the call as Day/Month/Year.
(2) Time : shows the time the call was started as Hour: Minute/AM or PM.
“
*
” indicates a transferred call.
(3) Ext. : shows the extension number, etc. that engaged in the call.
(4) CO : shows the exchange line number used for the call.
(5) Dial number
Outgoing call:
Received call:
Shows the called party’s telephone number (maximum 32 digits).
Valid digits are 0 through 9, #, and P (if the PAUSE button was pressed).
Shows <incoming>. An incoming call via the DISA feature is shown as <DISA incoming>, via the DIL feature is shown as
<DIL incoming>.
UCD waiting call: Shows <UCD waiting> for an incoming call via the UCD feature.
When the “UCD waiting call” is answered, it becomes a
“Received call” and a new record is started.
Features
3-63
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 64
S
3 Features
(6) Duration : shows the duration of the call or the UCD call waiting time in
Hours/Minutes/Seconds.
(7) Code: shows the account code appended to the call, account code index number
(e.g.: 13) or the extension number which uses the Walking COS feature
(e.g.: 201).
!
!
• This system can store information of up to 64 calls.
• This data is not deleted even when the system is reset.
• If RECALL is manually sent out during a conversation to make another call without hanging up, etc., a call record will be printed and a new record started. “F/” will be printed at the beginning of the dial number on the new record.
• When a host PBX code is entered, “=” will be printed between the code and dialled number.
• The language used for an SMDR printout can be selected in program [806].
☞
• Connection Reference
2.13 Printer and PC Connection
• Required System Programming
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One-Touch Dialling Printing
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
• Related Feature Reference
Language Selection
System Data Default Set
This system can re-initialise the system-programmed data. If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will reset using the default settings by program [999].
!
!
☞
• The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.1, Default Values.
• Required System Programming
• Installation Reference
2.23 System Data Clear
3-64
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 65
3 Features
S-T
System Speed Dialling
The system supports 100 System Speed Dial numbers (up to 32 digits) assigned in program
[001] that are available to all extension users. A System Speed Dial number is dialled out using a simple operation.
Each System Speed Dial number can be assigned a name in program [011]. The assigned name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature. It will also be displayed when an external caller’s telephone number matches one of System
Speed Dialling numbers and the Telephone Company does not provide the caller’s name.
!
!
☞
• Call Barring for System Speed Dialling can be assigned by program [301].
• A rotary telephone user cannot use this feature.
• Required System Programming
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class
• Related Feature
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling
• Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card References
Section 1.2, System Features
Caller ID
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.3 Making Calls, “Dialling with System Speed Dialling (System Speed Dialling)”
Timed Reminder
☞
<Timed Reminder>
Allows an extension user to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake-up alarm or a reminder. The user can set this to be activated once or everyday.
<Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)>
The operator or manager can remotely set, cancel and confirm the Timed Reminder of the desired extension.
For example, this is useful for a small hotel or motel to set an extension in a guest room as a wake-up call, or set an extension in a child’s room by a mother.
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Alarm Setting (Timed
Reminder)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)”
Features
3-65
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 66
T
3 Features
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
The system supports the day, night and lunch operation modes. The system operation for making and receiving calls can be different for the day, night and lunch modes. The system operation for call barring can be arranged to prevent unauthorised toll calls for each mode.
Time service can be set automatically or manually by program [006].
Changing the Day/Night/Lunch Modes
The day, night and lunch modes can be changed either automatically at an assigned time in program [007] or manually by the operator or manager at any desired time.
!
!
• The lunch mode interrupts the day or night mode. After the lunch mode is finished, the day or night mode starts again.
• If the lunch mode is set using feature number “783#” in the automatic mode, the mode can only be cancelled by using feature number “780#”. This can be useful during holidays. The day and night modes are automatically changed at the programmed time in
[007] even if feature number “780#” is not entered. These operations can only be done by an operator or manager.
• The operator and manager can see the status of the mode (day, night or lunch) by the preassigned DSS buttons’ LED on the DSS console. Time service can be changed easily by pressing the pre-assigned DSS buttons.
• The following programming items will be affected by the time service.
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
LUNCH
☞
• Required System Programming
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
• Operating Instructions References
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Setting”
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, Day, Night and Lunch Buttons
Assignment
3-66
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 67
3 Features
U
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Distributes incoming calls to one specific extension group called a UCD group assigned in program [520]. Calls to the UCD group hunt for an idle extension in numerical order. The
UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions.
!
!
• An optional OGM/FAX Detection Card is required to perform the UCD feature.
• The Log-In or Log-Out status can be set on an extension basis. There should be at least one extension that is in Log -In status in the UCD group.
• An extension which sets the Call Forwarding–All, –Busy or No Answer, or the Do Not
Disturb (DND) feature is skipped during circular calling.
• When all extensions in the UCD group are busy, a busy message is heard and then Music on Hold is activated. If any extension in the UCD group is not available within the programmed time period, then (1) an OGM will be heard and the call is disconnected, or
(2) the call will be sent to pre-programmed extension(s) in [408]-[410]. System
Programming is required for this operation. Refer to the “Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls”.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.15 OGM/FAX Detection Card Installation
• Required System Programming
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment – Day/Night/Lunch
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
[600] Extension Group Assignment
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb (DND), Extension Group, Log-In/Log-Out
Features
3-67
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 68
U
3 Features
Outline of a UCD
(1) When a number of calls have arrived at the UCD group, the first call arrives at extension A first.
(2) When the first call arrives at extension
A, the second call arrives at extension B.
Calls have arrived at the UCD group.
3rd call in queue
2nd call in queue
3rd call in queue
2nd call in queue
1st call in queue
UCD group
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@h?
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
Extension A
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ sion B.)
Extension B sion C.)
Extension C
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ sion A.)
@@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
?@@ @@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@g @@g
?@@ ?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@ ?@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
-
UCD group
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
Extension B
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ sion C.)
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
Extension C
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
Extension A
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@g @@g
@@g @@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ @@g @@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
?@@ ?@@
@@ @@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@
@@ @@
(3) When the second call arrives at extension B, the third call will arrive at extension C.
3-68
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 69
3 Features
U
Flow chart of possible cases and results for UCD calls
An outside line call is made.
The caller reaches the UCD group.
A
Busy
B
Call
OGM
*1
Answered.
The call is not answered.
Music on Hold is heard.
*2
Busy
Has the UCD Busy
Waiting Time expired?
No
*4
Goes to
Yes
Call
*3
B
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*9
Yes
No
Disconnect.
*10
The call is sent to another extension.
*11
C
Goes to
A
*5
What is the
OGM Mode?
*6
MODE3 or MODE5 MODE4 MODE6
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*7
The other
OGM is heard.
Yes
No
Disconnect.
Goes to C
Busy tone
The other
OGM is heard.
Is Intercept Routing employed?
*8
Yes
No
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Goes to DISA
The call is not answered.
Disconnect.
*10
Answered.
Note: The explanation for *1 through *11 is on the next page.
Features
3-69
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 70
U
3 Features
*1: An OGM is sent to the caller.
When the system detects a cyclic tone or CPC signal while the OGM is being sent, the call is disconnected.
*2: Music on hold is selected in program [111] as follows.
• External – Uses an external music source, such as a radio.
• Tone – Uses the cyclic tone equipped with the system.
*3: When an extension in the UCD group is available.
*4: The system holds the call until the assigned time in program [521] expires.
*5: OGM repeats the assigned time intervals in program [522] within the assigned time in program
[521].
*6: The OGM Mode is selected in program [502].
*7: The system treats the call according to program [523] as follows when the assigned time in [521] expires.
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.
• Intercept – The call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].
*8: The system treats the call according to program [523] as follows when the assigned time in [521] expires.
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.
• Intercept – The other OGM leads the caller to the DISA feature (☞ “Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)” in this section).
*9: The system treats the call according to program [524] as follows when the assigned time in [525] expires.
• Disconnect – The call is disconnected.
• Intercept – The call is sent to the extensions programmed in [408]-[410].
*10: If the caller did not hear an OGM, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
*11: The UCD Ring Timer after Intercept starts. The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in program [526]. If the call is not answered during the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
3-70
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 71
3 Features
V
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100
This system supports Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment (KX-TVP100) by sending DTMF tones described in program [103]. The DTMF tones sent to a VPS indicate the state of a call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.). The DTMF tones also inform a VPS of the destination of a call transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer feature. Up to 4 VPSs can be connected to the extension ports as extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number.
Outside Call
DIL, DISA
System
Intercom
Call
Extension
C.FWD
Port 1
KX-TVP100
Port 2
VM Hunting
Chain
Port 4 Port 3
Outside Call
DIL, DISA
System
Operator
Transfer
Extension
C.FWD
Port 1
KX-TVP100
Port 2
VM Hunting
Chain
Port 4 Port 3
Features
3-71
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 72
V
3 Features
1.2 DISA Intercept to VM
If the VPS is set as the Intercept destination of an exchange line, an outside call is forwarded to the VPS. The system sends the VPS the extension mailbox number at that time. Therefore, the calling party can leave their message in the mailbox of the desired extension without having to know the mailbox number. If a DISA call is transferred to the VPS by Intercept Routing from a DISA ring group, your system will transmit the mailbox number of the lowest port number of the DISA ring group. Delayed Ringing must be assigned to VPS extensions in programs [411]-[413].
Outside Call
DISA
System
Extension
Intercept
KX-TVP100
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
1.3 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator on the corresponding proprietary telephone to notify to the user. The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in their mailbox. When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message. A single line telephone user hears dial tone 3 (☞ “Distinctive Dial
Tones” in this section) when going off-hook if there are messages in their mailbox. They can call the voice mail extension to listen to their messages. In this case, they must listen to all of the messages. Once they access voice mail, dial tone 3 will be eliminated and not be heard next time they go off-hook. Therefore, they will not know even if there are messages left.
3-72
Features
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 73
3 Features
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service
2.1 AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling, which is sent from the calling party.
Outside Call
DIL, UCD
System
V
Extension
Transfer
KX-TVP100
AA 1
AA Hunting Chain or UCD Group
AA 2
AA 4 AA 3
!
!
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features.
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy/No Answer
DISA Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS.
• The mailbox number is the same as its extension number.
• The Voice Mail extension should set Data Line Security to prevent interference from system signals.
• If KX-TA624 cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP100, select “KX-T1232”. Follow the steps for a KX-T1232.
☞
• Connection Reference
2.8 Extension Connection
• Required System Programming
[009] Extension Number Assignment
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
[414]–[416] Exchange Line Mode — Day/Night/Lunch
• Related Feature References
Call Forwarding, Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Distinctive Dial Tones, Extension Hunting, Intercept Routing
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.7 Useful Features, “Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100”
Features
3-73
PSQX1708ZA-05E.QX 99.10.15 10:31 AM Page 74
V-W
3 Features
Volume Control
Allows a proprietary telephone user to adjust the following volumes, as necessary, by adjusting the corresponding levers or pressing the corresponding buttons.
• Handset receiver volume
• Ringer volume
• Speaker volume
☞
• Operating Instructions Reference
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Volume Control — Handset Receiver/
Ringer/Speaker”
Walking COS
Allows an extension user who is not at their own telephone to override the call barring COS number of another extension by dialling their extension password. For the duration of the call, the COS of the extension is changed to the COS of their own extension.
!
!
• If the extension overriding call barring is assigned to “Forced” or “Verify–All”, the user must enter the account code before the line access code.
• When a user makes a call using this feature, the user’s extension number will be displayed on the SMDR, not the extension where the user made the call.
☞
• Operating Instructions References
1.7 Useful Features, “Calling Using Your Privileges at Another Extension
(Walking COS)”
1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Extension Password Set (Manager only)”
3-74
Features
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 1
Section 4
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 2
4.1
Before System Programming
NOTE:
System data clear should be performed before System Programming.
(☞ 2.21, Starting the System for the First Time)
Default Setting
This system has factory default settings (☞ 5.1, Default Values). If any of the programming needs to be changed, you can change the setting by System Programming. Default shows you the factory default setting. Any required changes can be written in the Programming
Tables listed in section 7, Programming Tables.
Required Telephone Set
The following display proprietary telephone is required for System Programming.
• KX-T7130
Connect the telephone to the following.
• Port number 01
Before entering the programming mode
Before entering the programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Placing the Overlay on a Telephone
A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory. This overlay should be used at all times during programming. The functions of the telephone keys change during programming as shown below.
Location of Controls with the Overlay
SECRET
, –
1
4
2
5
7
PREV
8
0
FLASH END
3
6
9
CLEAR
PAUSE
STORE
AUTO
SELECT
NEXT
KX-T7130
4-2
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 3
4.1
Before System Programming
To enter the programming mode
MEMORY
SET PROGRAM
Set to “PROGRAM” on the back of the telephone.
#
Press #.
system password
Enter the system password.
(default : 1234)
!
!
• The system password can be changed by program [002] “System Password”.
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy extension.
• If you enter the wrong system password, you will hear an alarm tone (3 beeps). Try again.
Programming sequence
After entering the programming mode
X X X parameters
STORE END
Enter the Program Address. Enter the parameters.
Press the
STORE button.
Press the END button.
After pressing the STORE button, you will hear one of the following tones.
Confirmation tone (1 beep):
This informs you that storing is completed. You can continue programming by entering the same or another program address
(2 beeps):
This informs you that the same parameter has already been stored.
Alarm tone (3 beeps):
This informs you that the entry is invalid.
To exit the programming mode
MEMORY
SET PROGRAM
Set to “SET” on the back of the telephone.
System Programming
4-3
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 4
4.1
Before System Programming
Programming example
The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode.
Example: Program [404] “Trunk Group Assignment”
Program address Program title
[404] Trunk Group Assignment
Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups. Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, exchange lines can be grouped by company.
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@@@@@@@ @@ @@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@h?
@@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
NEXT
or
PREV
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@g
@@g @@g
@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@ @@@@@@@@ @@g
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@
?@@
?@@ ?@@ ?@@ ?@@
?@@@@@@@@ ?@@ ?@@@@@@@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@
@@ @@ @@ @@
@@ @@ @@ @@
To continue
Program description
!
!
☞
4 0 4
NEXT exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
trunk group no.* 2
(1···6)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* 1
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
* 2
Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6
Default
Exchange line 1 through 6 – Trunk group 1 through 6
• Each exchange line can only belong to one trunk group.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
Additional information
Provides the factory default setting. If you change the setting, write the programmed data in the programming table listed in section 7, Programming Tables.
Program sequence:
1. Enter program address “404”.
2. Press “NEXT”.
3. Enter the exchange line number
(1 through 6) or press to select all exchange lines.
4. Enter the trunk group number
(1 through 6).
5. Press “STORE”.
6. Press “END”.
To continue assigning another exchange line number, press
“SELECT” instead of “END” and repeat from step 3.
You can also continue assigning by pressing “PREV” or
“NEXT” instead of “END”.
You can go to the previous or next exchange line and repeat from step 4.
Additional Information
• When you press , for example in step 3 in program [404], if all exchange lines have been assigned as trunk group 1, “CO : TRK GRP – 1” will be displayed. If each exchange line has been assigned to a different trunk group, “CO : Mixed” will be displayed.
• You can press the SELECT button repeatedly to select the desired parameter, if available.
• You can use the or button to move to the next/previous step, if available.
4-4
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 5
4.2
System Programming
[000]-[001]
[000] Date and Time Setting
Sets the current date and time.
0 0
SELECT
(Sun···Sat)
0
NEXT hour
(1···12)
year
(00···99)
minute
(00···59)
SELECT
(Jan.···Dec.)
day day
(1···31)
SELECT
(AM/PM)
STORE
END
Default
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM
!
!
• To return to the previous programming step, press .
• To correct a wrong entry for the year, day, hour or minute, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one in each step.
• After changing an entry, you can press the STORE button. You do not have to perform the rest of the steps.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• The system supports years from 1998 to 2097.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Date and Time Setting, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
Assigns a maximum of 100 System Speed Dialling numbers. To delete a stored phone number, press the CLEAR and STORE buttons after entering the Speed Dialling number.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 0 1
NEXT speed dialling no.
(00···99)
phone no.
32 digits max.
(e.g. 0···9, )
SELECT
STORE
To continue
Default
Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• A line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) should be included before the phone number.
END
System Programming
4-5
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 6
[001]-[002]
4.2
System Programming
• Up to 32 digits, consisting of “0 through 9”, “ ,”, “#”, “PAUSE”, “—”,“RECALL” and
“ICM (Secret)”can be stored.
• If you are storing an account code assigned in [310] “Account Codes”, enter and the account code after a line access number.
• If you want to conceal all or part of a System Speed Dialling number on the display, enter
“[” and “]” (press the ICM button) before and after the part you want to conceal. Do not press the ICM button before and after a line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) or an account code. “[” and “]” are counted as one digit.
• Press or to scroll the display
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Secret Dialling, System Speed Dialling
[002] System Password
Assigns the password required for entering the System Programming mode. Also it is used to set an extension password.
0 0 2
NEXT password
4 digits
(0000···9999)
STORE
END
Default
1234
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Extension Password / System Password
4-6
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 7
4.2
System Programming
[003]-[004]
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
Assigns a maximum of 2 port numbers to connect the DSS console(s).
0 0 3
NEXT
DSS console no.
(1···2)
extension port no.
STORE
(02···16)
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
Default
All DSS consoles – Disable (Not stored)
!
!
☞
• Two DSS consoles cannot be assigned to the same port number.
• Extension port 01 is the manager extension. So please do not assign extension port 01 as the DSS console port.
• To not assign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step.
• The extension port number which has already been assigned as a paired telephone in program
[004] “Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console” is not available in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
Assigns a port number for an extension paired with the DSS console.
0 0 4
NEXT
DSS console no.
(1···2)
extension port no.
STORE
(01···16)
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
Default
Extension port number paired with DSS console 1 – Disable (Not stored)
Extension port number paired with DSS console 2 – Disable (Not stored)
!
!
☞
• A single line telephone (SLT) cannot be paired with the DSS console.
• To not assign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step.
• The extension port number which has already been assigned as a DSS console in program
[003] “DSS Console Port Assignment” is not available in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
4-7
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 8
[005]-[006]
4.2
System Programming
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
Selects how an outside call is transferred to any extension using the DSS button.
With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside call.
Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button then the DSS button to transfer an outside call.
0 0 5
END NEXT SELECT STORE
(With Transfer/
Without Transfer)
Default
With Transfer
!
!
☞
• This program is effective for 2 kinds of DSS buttons. One is on the DSS console, and the other is flexible line key on your proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button.
• Operating Instructions References
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings, “Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button
1.9 DSS Console Features, “Initial Settings”, One-Touch Dialling Assignment
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
Selects changing the day, night and lunch service manually or automatically. For manual changing, refer to the Operating Instructions. For automatic changing, set the next program
[007] “Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time”.
0 0 6
NEXT SELECT
(Man/Auto)
STORE
Default
Manual
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
END
4-8
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 9
4.2
System Programming
[007]-[008]
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
Sets the starting time on a week day basis, when “Automatic” is selected in program [006]
“Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode”.
0 0
7
NEXT NEXT
or
PREV
(Sun···Sat)
* 1 or
SELECT
(Every day) (Day/Night/
Lunch-S/Lunch-E)
To go to another day of the week
To go to another mode hour
or
SELECT
*
2
(1···12)
minute
(00···59)
SELECT
(AM/PM)
STORE
END
<If you press the SELECT button>
*
1
To assign every day of the week to one selection, press the button.
* 2
If the SELECT button is pressed, the display will show the previous entry. If the previous setting was “None”, press the SELECT button to enter the starting time. If you do not need to change the time service, keep pressing the SELECT button until “None” is displayed. For example, if Monday’s day mode is set to “None”, the day mode will not be turned on Monday.
Default
Everyday – Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:30 PM /
Lunch-S (starting) – None / Lunch-E (ending) – None
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service
[008] Operator Assignment
Assigns an extension port number for the operator.
0 0
8
NEXT extension port no.
(01···24)
STORE
Default
Jack-01
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Operator / Manager Extension, Operator Call
END
System Programming
4-9
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 10
[009]
4.2
System Programming
[009] Extension Number Assignment
Selects an extension numbering plan, Plan 1, Plan 2 or Plan 3, and assigns an extension number to each extension.
Plan 1: Available extension numbers are 200 through 299.
Plan 2: Available extension numbers are 100 through 499.
Plan 3: Available extension numbers are 10 through 49.
0 0
9
NEXT SELECT
(Plan:1/2/3)
STORE
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT extension port no.
(01···24)
extension no.
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
Plan 1: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 201 through 224
!
!
• If the selected extension numbering plan is the same as the previously stored one, 2 beeps will be heard.
• If “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” is selected, the default extension numbers will change automatically as follows.
Plan 2: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 201 through 224
Plan 3: extension ports 01 through 24 – extension numbers 21 through 44
• If “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” is selected, some feature numbers will also change. Refer to the attached leaflet for details.
• A double entry of the extension number is invalid. If the programmed extension number is the same as a previously stored one, 2 beeps will be heard when the STORE button is pressed. When extension number 203 has already been assigned to port number 03, to assign extension number 203 to the port number 05, change the extension number of port number 03 to another one. Then assign extension number 203 to port number 05.
• If a Voice Processing System (VPS) is connected to the system, select “Plan 1” or “Plan
2” in this program and “Enable” in [103] “DTMF Integration”, so that the DTMF integration between VPS and the system can be enabled.
• If a rotary telephone is used at any extension, select “Plan 1” in this program.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Intercom Calling
4-10
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 11
4.2
System Programming
[010]
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
Selects how the current time and date will be displayed on a proprietary telephone while idle.
Either 12 hour or 24 hour (military time) can be selected.
0 1 0
NEXT SELECT
(12/24 HOUR)
STORE
Display example:
When “12 HOUR” is selected: Jan 1 11:20PM
When “24 HOUR” is selected: 1 Jan 23:20
END
Default
12 HOUR
!
!
• Programs [000] “Date and Time Setting” and [007] “Time (Day/Night/ Lunch) Service
Start Time”, and the Timed Reminder feature are assigned using 12-hour time regardless of this program. The SMDR printout is also printed using 12-hour time.
System Programming
4-11
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 12
[011]
4.2
System Programming
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
Assigns a name to each System Speed Dialling number. The name will be displayed when making a call by using the System Speed Dialling feature. It will also be used for the Caller
ID feature.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 1 1
NEXT speed dialling no.
(00···99)
name*
16 characters max.
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Name:
Combination Table
Pressing SELECT
(Times)
Keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W m p g j t w
.
+
%
2 q a d
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
-
&
3
Z
B
E
# #
”
$
<Example>
— To enter “Mike;
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.
n r h k u x
’
=
@
4 z b e
O
S
I
L
V
Y
:
<
(
5
!
C
F
END
6
?
c f o s v y l i
;
>
)
Default
All System Speed Dialling numbers – Not stored.
!
!
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press
• Each name has a maximum of 16 characters.
• Press to scroll the display to the right side.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
System Speed Dialling
4-12
System Programming
.
PSQX1708ZA-06E.QX 99.10.15 10:33 AM Page 13
4.2
System Programming
[012]
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan
Replaces any feature number with a code number 50 through 59. This is useful when selecting “Plan 2” or “Plan 3” in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment” as some feature numbers change for Plan 2 and Plan 3 and they might be difficult to remember.
(Refer to the attached leaflet “Notice for the Feature Numbers”.) All extension users can dial these assigned codes instead of feature numbers.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
0 1 2
NEXT code no.
(50···59)
Feature no.
10 digits max.
(0···9, , #)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
!
!
Default
All codes – Not stored.
• This is not possible when “Plan 1” has been selected in program [009].
System Programming
4-13
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 14
[100]-[101]
4.2
System Programming
[100] Hunting Group Set
Enables or disables automatically locating an idle extension in the same extension group as the dialled extension, when the called extension is busy. If “Enable” is selected, assign the next program [101] “Hunting Type”. Extension groups are defined in program [600]
“Extension Group Assignment”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 0
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)
END
Default
All extension groups – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Extension Hunting
[101] Hunting Type
Assigns the hunting type, Terminate or Circular, to each extension group when a hunting group is enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 1
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Terminate/
Circular)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)
Default
All extension groups – Terminate
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Extension Hunting
4-14
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 15
4.2
System Programming
[102]
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100
Assigns the extension port number(s) connected to a Panasonic Voice Processing System
(VPS) equipment (KX-TVP100). Only extension ports 07, 08, 15 and 16 are available.
1
0
2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension port no.*
(07,08,15,16/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 07, 08, 15 and/or 16 / (All 4 extension ports)
Default
All 4 extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100
System Programming
4-15
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 16
[103]
4.2
System Programming
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100
Enables or disables the system to send codes (DTMF signals) to the extension(s) assigned as the Voice Mail Port in program [102] “Voice Mail Port”. These DTMF signals indicate the state of the call (busy, answered, ringing, disconnected, etc.) in addition to the normal call tones. They also enable the Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) equipment
(KX-TVP100) to immediately recognise the current state of the call and speed up the call handling.
1
Default
0 3
Disable
NEXT
SELECT
(Enable/Disable)
STORE
END
!
!
☞
• The table on next page describes the codes (DTMF signals), call state and conditions for the DTMF integration operation.
• Select “Plan 1” or “Plan 2” in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment”, and select
“Enable” in this program to enable the DTMF integration.
• This feature greatly improves the performance of the Panasonic KX-TVP100: Voice
Processing Systems which have been programmed for Inband Signalling. For more information about Inband Signalling, refer to your Voice Processing System manual.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100
DTMF signals
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#9
Call State
Ringback Tone
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
DND
Answer
Forwarded to
Voice Processing
System
(Ringing)
Forwarded to
Voice Mail (Busy)
Forwarded to
Extension
Confirmation Tone
Disconnect
Conditions
When an extension a VPS has dialled is ringing.
When an extension a VPS has dialled is busy.
When a VPS dials an invalid extension number or when a VPS is accidentally connected to another Voice Mail Port.
When an extension a VPS has dialled sets the DND (Do Not
Disturb) feature.
When an extension which a VPS has dialled answers the call.
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS, the call can be forwarded to another available VPS. In this way, the first VPS, typically an Auto-Attendant, can release the call to another
VPS and receive another incoming call.
When a called extension is forwarded to a VPS and no VPSs are available to receive the call.
When a called extension is forwarded to another, non-VPS extension.
When a VPS has successfully turned a message waiting lamp on or a message waiting lamp off.
When the calling party disconnects.
4-16
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 17
4.2
System Programming
[104]-[105]
[104] Hold Mode Selection
You can select how to hold a line and transfer a call to another extension with a single line telephone (SLT), Hold-1, Hold-2 or Hold-3. If the following occurs frequently with an SLT, select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”.
• Nobody answers when a call is received.
• A busy tone is heard even though nobody is using the exchange line.
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, select “Hold-2” or “Hold-3”. Every call will be terminated unless 50 is dialled after pressing the Recall button in the Hold-2 and Hold-3 modes.
Hold-1: To hold a line or transfer a call, press the Recall button.
Hold-2: To hold a line, press the Recall button and dial 50. To transfer a call, press the
Recall button.
Hold-3: To hold a line or transfer a call, press the Recall button and dial 50.
1 0 4
Default
Hold-1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Hold
NEXT SELECT
(Hold-1/Hold-2
Hold-3)
STORE END
[105] Conference Tone
Enables or disables the confirmation tone before starting or ending a conference call established by the Conference feature or Executive Busy Override feature.
1 0 5
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Conference (3-party), Conference (5-party), Executive Busy Override
System Programming
4-17
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 18
[106]-[108]
4.2
System Programming
[106] External Paging Access Tone
Enables or disables the splash tone before paging is sent over the external pager.
1 0 6
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Paging
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
Enables or disables the 6 DTMF receivers to check whether the DTMF receivers are activated normally or not. Refer to the Section 6 Troubleshooting, “While Operating” for further information on checking the DTMF receivers.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1 0 7
NEXT
DTMF receiver no.*
(1··6)
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
* DTMF receiver number: 1 and 2 (for checking extension ports 01 through 08)/
3 and 4 (for checking extension ports 09 through 16)/
5 and 6 (for checking extension ports 17 through 24)
Default
All DTMF receivers – Enable
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension
Enables or disables a locked extension to send a recall signal during a conversation with an external party.
1 0 8
NEXT
END
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Disable
4-18
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 19
4.2
System Programming
[109]-[110]
[109] CO Indicator Assignment
!
!
Enables or disables an extension which was assigned not to ring in programs [408]-[410]
“Flexible Ringing Assignment” to answer an incoming outside call. The line key indicator will flash when an outside call is received. If enabled, an extension user can answer the call by pressing the flashing line key. If disabled, the user cannot answer the call even if they press the line key.
1 0 9
END NEXT SELECT STORE
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
• The extension must be a proprietary telephone with a line key and indicator.
[110] Recall Key Mode
Assigns the sending of the recall signal mode, MODE 1 or MODE 2, when the RECALL button on a proprietary telephone is pressed.
MODE 1: The recall signal is sent during the programmed time in [418] “Recall Time”.
MODE 2: The recall signal is sent while the RECALL button is pressed if the time the
RECALL button was pressed is more than the programmed time in [418].
This will be useful to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. If the time the RECALL button was pressed is less than the programmed time in [418], the recall signal will be sent during the programmed time.
1 1 0
NEXT END SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
Default
MODE 1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Recall
System Programming
4-19
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:34 AM Page 20
[111]-[112]
4.2
System Programming
[111] Hold Music Selection
Selects the music source, External or Tone, which an external party will hear when an outside call is on hold.
External : Uses an external music source, such as a radio.
Tone : Uses the cyclic tone below equipped with the system.
1 s
1
Default
1 1
External
NEXT SELECT
(External/Tone)
STORE
!
!
☞
• The music source can also be used for BGM.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Music on Hold / Background Music (BGM)
END
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
Enables or disables the Busy Lamp Field (BLF) on the DSS button to indicate the status,
Forward (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND), of corresponding extensions.
1 1 2
NEXT SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)*
STORE END
* Enable: FWD – Flashing slowly, DND – Flashing moderately
Disable: FWD – Off, DND – Off
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
DSS Console
4-20
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:35 AM Page 21
4.2
System Programming
[115]-[116]
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
Selects the extension ringing pattern when an intercom call received, either Single, Double or Triple.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
END
1
Default
1 5
Single
NEXT SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple)
STORE
!
!
☞
• The length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT) is determined in program
[124] “SLT Ringing Mode Selection”.
• The extension ringback pattern is determined at the same time.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Ringing Pattern Selection
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
Selects the maximum number of external parties which can attend a conference. The maximum number of conference parties is 5.
3-party C-0 E-3: No external parties can attend a 3-party conference.
3-party C-1 E-3: One external party can attend a 3-party conference.
3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 3-party conference.
5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 external parties can attend a 5-party conference.
1 1 6
NEXT SELECT
(3-party C-0 E-3/
3-party C-1 E-3/
3-party C-2 E-3/
5-party C-2 E-5)
STORE
Default
5-party C-2 E-5
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Conference (3-Party), Conference (5-Party)
END
System Programming
4-21
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:35 AM Page 22
[117]-[119]
4.2
System Programming
[117] Call Pickup Tone
Enables or disables the confirmation tone when the Call Pickup feature is activated.
1 1 7
NEXT END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
[118] Pulse Restriction
Enables or disables sending pulse dialling to the Local Exchange during a conversation with an external party when “Pulse Mode” or “Call Block Mode” is selected in program [401]
“Dial Mode”.
1
1 8
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion
Enables or disables sending tone dialling to the Local Exchange when an extension user redials after changing the pulse mode into tone mode by pressing and #.
1
1 9
NEXT END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
4-22
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:35 AM Page 23
4.2
System Programming
[120] Bell Frequency
Selects the bell frequency sent to a single line telephone (SLT).
1
2 0
NEXT SELECT
(20/25 Hz)
STORE END
Default
25 Hz
[120]-[122]
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number Selection
Selects the Automatic Exchange Line Access number ( 0 or 9).
1 2 1
NEXT SELECT
(Dial 0/Dial 9)
STORE END
Default
Dial 9
!
!
☞
• If you select “0”, the operator call will automatically be “9”. If you select “9”, the operator call will automatically be “0”
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number, Operator Call
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access
Enables or disables the rotation of exchange lines seized for “Automatic Exchange Line
Access”.
1 2 2
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable
Disable)
Default
Disable (Does not rotate.)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number
System Programming
4-23
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:35 AM Page 24
[123]-[125]
4.2
System Programming
[123] Break Ratio
Selects the pulse break rate, MODE1 or MODE 2, when a Pulse is sent to the Local
Exchange during a conversation.
MODE 1: 66 %
MODE 2: 60 %
1 2 3
NEXT END SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
Default
MODE 1
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection
Selects the length of the ring cycle for a single line telephone (SLT).
MODE 1: 5 second cycle
MODE 2: 3 second cycle
1 2
4
NEXT END SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
Default
MODE 2
[125] Call Barring Check for
and #
Assigns whether the entered “ ” and “#” are checked by call barring or not. This assignment is required for certain Local Exchanges to prevent toll fraud. Some Central
Offices ignore the user-dialled “ ” and “#”. If your Local Exchange ignores these symbols, select “Disable”.
.
1
2 5
NEXT END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
Default
Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
4-24
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-07E.QX 99.10.15 10:35 AM Page 25
4.2
System Programming
[126]-[127]
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode
Enables or disables making an intercom call just by pressing a DSS button on a DSS
Console. If enabled, going off-hook is not needed.
.
1
2
6
NEXT STORE END SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable
!
!
☞
• This assignment is also effective for a flexible line key on a proprietary telephone assigned as a DSS button.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Intercom Calling
[127] Pickup Group Set
Enables or disables the ability of an extension to pickup a call ringing at another extension
(if it is in the same extension group) by just going off-hook. If enabled, the feature number
(40) is not needed to pickup the call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
1
2 7
NEXT extension group no.*
(1···8/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension group number: 1 through 8 / (all extension groups)
Default
All extension groups – Disable (the feature number (40) is required to pickup the call)
!
!
• To prevent other extensions in the same extension group from picking up outside calls by just going off-hook, select “Disable” in program [109] “CO Indicator Assignment”. Then even though “Enable” is selected in this program [127], outside calls cannot be picked up by others by just going off-hook.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
4-25
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 26
[200]-[201]
4.2
System Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time
Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. Hold recall (a ring tone or an alarm tone) is heard when the timer expires. If hold recall is not required, select “Disable”.
2
Default
0 0
30 seconds
NEXT
SELECT
(30 sec/
1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/
Disable)
STORE
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Call Park, Hold
END
[201] Transfer Recall Time
Assigns the length of the transfer recall timer. If a transferred call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be returned to the original caller.
2 0 1
NEXT
Default
30 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Transfer – to Extension
SELECT
(15/30 sec/
1/2 min)
STORE
END
4-26
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 27
4.2
System Programming
[202]-[203]
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
Assigns time for the Call Forwarding – No Answer feature. If a call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be forwarded to the destination.
2
Default
0 2
NEXT
SELECT
15 seconds delay
(5/10/15/20 sec delay)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Forwarding
STORE
END
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time
Assigns the length of time for the Pickup Dialling feature. If the telephone user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called automatically when the timer expires. This delay gives the user an opportunity to enter numbers before automatic dialling occurs.
2 0 3
NEXT
SELECT
(1/2/3/4 sec)
STORE
END
Default
3 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pickup Dialling
System Programming
4-27
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 28
[204], [206]
4.2
System Programming
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
Assigns the start time of a conversation either immediately after an exchange line is seized or after dialling. This corresponds to the length of the conversation displayed on the LCD and printed on the printer (SMDR).
2 0 4
END
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(5/10/15/20/25/30/
35/40/45/50 sec after dial/Instantly)
Default
10 seconds after dialling
!
!
☞
• If reverse signal detection is enabled in program [424] “Reverse (Polarity) Circuit
Assignment”, the system will automatically start the timer immediately after an external party answers a call.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Polarity Reverse Detection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[206] Dialling Start Time
Assigns the minimum length of the pause time the system waits before dialling after seizing an exchange line.
2 0 6
NEXT
SELECT
(0/250/500/750/
1000/1250/1500 ms)
STORE
Default
0 millisecond
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
END
4-28
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 29
4.2
System Programming
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection
Sets the hookswitch recall time range sent from an extension to the system.
MODE 1: 50 to 180 milliseconds.
MODE 2: 80 to 180 milliseconds.
MODE 3: 80 to 650 milliseconds.
MODE 4: 80 to 1000 milliseconds.
MODE 5: 200 to 1000 milliseconds.
2
Default
0
7
MODE 1
NEXT
SELECT
(MODE1/MODE2/
MODE3/MODE4/
MODE5)
STORE
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone
END
[207]-[208]
[208] Interdigit Time
Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits for an outgoing outside call.
2 0 8
NEXT
SELECT
(5/10/15/ 20 sec)
STORE
END
Default
20 seconds
!
!
• The interdigit timer applies until the call barring check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was selected in program [211] “No Dial Disconnection”.
• For a single line telephone, an outgoing outside call will be released from a DTMF receiver when the interdigit timer expires.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
System Programming
4-29
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 30
[210]-[211]
4.2
System Programming
[210] DTMF Time
Assigns the minimum duration of a DTMF signal sent to an exchange line which is set to the
DTMF mode in program [401] “Dial Mode”.
MODE 1: 80 milliseconds
MODE 2: 160 milliseconds
2 1 0
NEXT
END SELECT
(MODE1/
MODE2)
STORE
Default
MODE 1
[211] No Dial Disconnection
Enables or disables disconnecting an exchange line if an extension user does not dial anything within 20 seconds after an exchange line is seized.
2 1
1
NEXT STORE
END
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
Default
Enable (Disconnect)
!
!
☞
• The interdigit timer assigned in program [208] “Interdigit Time” applies until the call barring check is completed. When the timer expires, an outgoing outside call will be disconnected while dialling, if “Enable” was selected in this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
4-30
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 31
4.2
System Programming
[212]-[213]
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit
Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an external party. This program is effective for the extension(s) which assigned “Enable” in program [613] “Exchange Line
Duration Time Limit Selection”.
2 1 2
NEXT time
(1··32 minutes)
STORE
END
Default
10 minutes
!
!
• A beep sounds at 5-second intervals 15 seconds before the programmed time expires.
• This program is effective only for an outgoing outside call.
• When making a call after an exchange line is seized and transferred to the enabled extension in program [613] by another extension, the timer starts after the call has been transferred.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Limited Call Duration
[213] Bell Off Detection
Sets the maximum time between detecting one bell signal and the next from the Local
Exchange. In case the next bell signal is not detected within the programmed time, the system recognises the bell signal has stopped.
2 1 3
NEXT
SELECT
(3/6/12 sec)
STORE
END
Default
3 seconds
System Programming
4-31
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 32
[300]-[301]
4.2
System Programming
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
Assigns up to 20 carrier excepted codes, for example, Per Call Block code ( 141). The system disregards the assigned code, and call barring and ARS are applied to the numbers after the code.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 0 0
NEXT code no.
(01···20)
code
10 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
!
!
Example:
Code no. 01: 141
Dialling number: 141 01633 877 467 disregarded applied to the call barring and ARS
Default
All codes – Not stored.
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
[301] Call Barring – System Speed Dialling Boundary Class
Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dialling numbers. System Speed Dialling numbers can be assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Entry”.
3 0 1
NEXT
SELECT
(Class-1···5)*
STORE END
* Boundary Class: 1 through 5
Default
Boundary Class -1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring for System Speed Dialling
4-32
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 33
4.2
System Programming
[302]-[305]
[302]-[305] Call Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes
Assigns up to 20 toll call numbers which are restricted to make outside calls on a class of service (COS) basis for each program.
3 0
X
NEXT code no.
(01···20)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue phone no.
11 digits
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 2 ([302] for Class 2) / 3 ([303] for Class 3)/
4 ([304] for Class 4) / 5 ([305] for Class 5)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
System Programming
4-33
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 34
[306], [309]
4.2
System Programming
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes
Assigns up to 80 exception numbers which are allowed to make outside calls on a class of service (COS) basis even when denied codes are programmed in [302]-[305] “Call Barring
– Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 0 6
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
phone no.
11 digits
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• Each phone number should consist of 11 digits.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
END
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
Assigns up to 5 emergency numbers, for example, a police station or fire station. Calls with these numbers are free from restrictions, for example, call barring, Account Code –
Forced/Verify–All mode and Electronic Extension Lock.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 0 9
NEXT code no.
(1···5)
emergency no.
11 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Default
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored.
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Emergency Call, Call Barring
4-34
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 35
4.2
System Programming
[310]-[311]
[310] Account Codes
Assigns up to 24 account codes which are compared with the code entered when
“Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” is selected in program [605] “Account Code
Entry Mode”. If “Verify-All” is selected, an account code is required to make an outside call. If “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” is selected, an account code is only required to override call barring.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 1 0
NEXT code no.
(01···24)
account code
4 digits
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Call Barring Override by Account Codes
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Assigns up to 40 automatic pause insertion codes which are checked with the outside outgoing call number. When one of the codes is the same as the call number, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause Time” is automatically inserted after the code. If a second dial tone is sent from your Local Exchange, it is convenient to assign the area code as the pause code.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 1 1
NEXT code no.
(01···40)
pause code
7 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
System Programming
4-35
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 36
[312]
4.2
System Programming
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class
Assigns the Call Barring class for an extension which has set the Electronic Extension
Lockout or Remote Extension Lock Control.
3
1 2
NEXT SELECT
(Disable/
COS-2···5)*
STORE END
* Boundary COS: 2 through 5 / Disable (Disables all outside outgoing calls.)
Default
Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class
4-36
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 37
4.2
System Programming
[350]-[354]
[350] ARS Selection
Enables or disables the ARS feature for each exchange line.
3 5 0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are applied to the ARS feature for each route.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 5
X
(1···4)
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
area code
7 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 1 ([351] for Route 1) / 2 ([352] for Route 2)/
3 ([353] for Route 3) / 4 ([354] for Route 4)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-37
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 38
[355]-[359]
4.2
System Programming
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes
Assigns up to 80 area codes for outside calls which are not applied to the ARS feature for each route.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 5 X
(5···8)
NEXT code no.
(01···80)
area code
7 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
X
– Program address selection number: 5 ([355] for Route 1) / 6 ([356] for Route 2)/
7 ([357] for Route 3) / 8 ([358] for Route 4)
Default
All codes – Not stored.
!
!
☞
• “x” (press the PAUSE button) substitutes any number (= wild card).
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)
Assigns the first carrier access code. When the code is dialled, the first carrier is always selected even if the ARS feature is enabled.
3 5 9
NEXT
1st carrier access code
4 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
END
Default
121 (British Telecom Line access code)
!
!
☞
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
4-38
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 39
4.2
System Programming
[360]-[361]
[360] ARS Modification – Removed Digits
Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the exchange line for each route. The digits are deleted from the beginning of the dialled number.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 0
NEXT route no.
(1···4)
removed digits
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
All routes – 0 (No deletion)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[361] ARS Modification – Added Number
Determines how the dialled number applied to the ARS feature should be modified before sending to the exchange line for each route. Numbers are added to the beginning of the dialled number. Numbers can be carrier codes, etc.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6
1
NEXT route no.
(1···4)
added number
20 digits max.
(0···9, ,#)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Press to scroll the display to the right side.
• The assigned numbers will be added to the dialled number after deleting the digits programmed in [360] “ARS Modification — Removed Digits”.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-39
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 40
[362]-[363]
4.2
System Programming
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
Selects the dial tone pattern, Disable (no tone), Tone1, Tone2 or Tone3, generated after seizing an ARS exchange line. The ARS feature is enabled on an exchange line basis in program [350] “ARS Selection”. The tone will stop after the first digit (except for an account code) is dialled.
1 s
Tone1:
Tone2:
Tone3:
3 6 2
NEXT
SELECT
(Disable/Tone1/
Tone2/Tone3)
STORE
Default
Tone1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
END
[363] ARS Interdigit Time
Assigns the interdigit timer (in seconds) used while the system is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature.
3 6 3
NEXT time
(1···20)
STORE END
Default
5 seconds
!
!
☞
• This assignment should be the same as the interdigit timer assigned in program [208]
“Interdigit Time”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
4-40
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 41
4.2
System Programming
[364]
[364] ARS Trunk Group
Assigns trunk group(s) for each ARS route number. Trunk groups are assigned in program
[404] “Trunk Group Assignment”. An exchange line in the assigned trunk group(s) is automatically seized when making an outside call using the Automatic Exchange Line
Access number (9 or 0), and the dialled number is applied to one of the ARS route numbers.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 6 4
NEXT route no.
(1···4)
trunk group no.*
(1···6/ )
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
* Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6 / (All trunk (TRK) groups)
Default
All routes – (All trunk (TRK) groups)
!
!
☞
• Programs [351]-[354] “Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)” should be considered when assigning this program.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-41
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 42
[381]-[384]
4.2
System Programming
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation Codes
Registers an authorisation code applied to the exchange line(s).
3 8
X
(1···4)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
authorisation code
19 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
!
!
X
– Program address selection number: 1 ([351] for Route 1) / 2 ([352] for Route 2)/
3 ([353] for Route 3) / 4 ([354] for Route 4)
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Not stored.
• The registered codes are not shown on the display of a proprietary telephone and printout by program [804] “System Data Damp” after programming. “Already Set” will be shown instead of the registered codes.
4-42
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-08E.QX 99.10.15 1:01 PM Page 43
4.2
System Programming
[385]-[389]
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill
Enables or disables to add an extension number assigned in program [389] “Itemised Bill
Code Assignment” after the authorisation code for an exchange line(s). This is useful for billing purposes.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
3 8
X
(5···8)
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
☞
X
– Program address selection number: 5 ([385] for Route 1) / 2 ([386] for Route 2)/
3 ([387] for Route 3) / 4 ([388] for Route 4)
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Disable
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment
Assigns the itemised bill code for each extension for dividing a bill.
NEXT
or
PREV
3 8 9
NEXT
To continue extension port no.
(01···24/ )
itemised bill code.
3 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
SELECT To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)
Default
Extension ports 01 through 24 – 201 through 224
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
System Programming
4-43
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:03 PM Page 44
[400]-[401]
4.2
System Programming
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment
Assigns which exchange line(s) is connected to the system or not.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 0
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Connect/
Not connect)
STORE
To continue
END
☞
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Connect
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
[401] Dial Mode
Selects the dialling mode, DTMF, Pulse or C. BLK (Call Blocking), for each exchange line.
DTMF: The dialling signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to
Tone and transmitted to the Local Exchange. If the system is connected directly to the Local Exchange or installed behind a host PBX, which receives both Tone and Pulse, select this mode.
Pulse : The dialling signals from an extension, either Tone or Pulse, are converted to
Pulse and transmitted to the Local Exchange.
C. BLK: If your Local Exchange can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the user are contracted for Pulse, select this mode. When dialling with a touch tone telephone, only Pulse signals are sent to the Local Exchange.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
☞
4 0 1
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(DTMF/Pulse/
C.BLK Mode)
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – DTMF Mode
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
END
4-44
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:03 PM Page 45
4.2
System Programming
[402]-[403]
[402] Pulse Speed Selection
Selects a pulse rate for each exchange line which sets “Pulse Mode” or “Call block Mode” in program [401] “Dial Mode”. There are 2 pulse rates, Low Speed (10 pps) and High Speed
(20 pps).
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 2
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Low/High
Speed)
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Low Speed
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
If the system is installed behind a host PBX, each exchange line may require an access code to make an outside call. Up to 8 access codes can be stored for each exchange line. When the programmed codes are dialled, the pause time assigned in program [417] “Pause Time” is automatically inserted, and call barring is applied after the code.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0 3
NEXT exchange line no.*
1
(1···6/ )
access code*
2
STORE
Up to 8 access codes
1 or 2 digits
To continue
(0···9)
SELECT
!
!
☞
*
1
*
2
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Insert a “,” for each code using the
, button on the overlay.
Example:
• Access codes 81, 82 on exchange line number 1
4 0 3
NEXT
1 8 1
,
8 2
STORE END
Default
All exchange lines – Not stored
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Host PBX Access
END
4-45
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 46
[404]
4.2
System Programming
[404] Trunk Group Assignment
Assigns a maximum 6 trunk groups. Each exchange line must be assigned to an trunk group. For example, if there are multiple telephone service companies available, exchange lines can be grouped by company.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4 0
4
NEXT exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
trunk group no.* 2
(1···6)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* 1
* 2
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Trunk (TRK) group number: 1 through 6
Default
Exchange line 1 through 6 – Trunk group 1 through 6
!
!
☞
• Each exchange line can only belong to one trunk group.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
4-46
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 47
4.2
System Programming
[405]-[407]
[405]-[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Determines which extension(s) can make an outside call in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
port number
4
X
(05···07)
NEXT exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
# extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
SELECT STORE END
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
Go to another port number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 05 ([405] for day) / 06 ([406] for night) /
07 ([407] for lunch)
*
1
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
*
2 Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Outside Calling
System Programming
4-47
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 48
[408]-[410]
4.2
System Programming
[408]-[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside calls in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
To continue
Go to next or prev.
port number
4 X
(08···10)
NEXT exchange line no.*
1
(1···6/ )
# extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
To continue
SELECT
STORE END
Go to another port number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 08 ([408] for day) / 09 ([409] for night) /
10 ([410] for lunch)
*
1 Exchange line number: 1 through 6 (All exchange lines)
*
2
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Exchange Line Ringing Selection, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD),
Receiving Calls
4-48
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 49
4.2
System Programming
[411]-[413]
[411]-[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Assigns the ringing start time for extension(s) which were selected to ring in programs
[408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch” in the day, night and/or lunch modes.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number or
4 X
(11···13)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
port number
exchange line no.*
1
(1···6/ )
# extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Immdtly/
10/20/30 sec)
STORE
SELECT
END
To continue
Go to another port number
To continue
Go to another line number
X
– Program address selection number: 11 ([411] for day) / 12 ([412] for night)/
13 ([413] for lunch)
*
1 Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
*
2
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Immediately
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Receiving Calls
System Programming
4-49
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 50
[414]-[416]
4.2
System Programming
[414]-[416] Exchange Line Mode —Day/Night/Lunch
Selects the mode of an incoming outside call on each exchange Line in the day, night and lunch modes. There are the following 5 modes.
Normal: An incoming outside call will be received at the extension(s) assigned in programs [408]–[410] “Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch”.
DIL: An incoming outside call will be received at the assigned extension in this program.
DISA1: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller will hear a tone or an outgoing message.
DISA2: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the DISA feature. A caller might hear OGM 2; for various configurations please see Cases
2, 3 and 4 in Section 3, Features “Outgoing Message (OGM).
UCD: An incoming outside call will be received at an extension through the UCD feature.
< To select Normal,
DISA or UCD >
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
X
(14···16)
NEXT exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Normal/DIL/
DISA1/DISA2/
UCD)
To continue
SELECT
END
< To select DIL >
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
4
X
(14···16)
NEXT exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Normal/DIL/
DISA1/DISA2/
UCD)
extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
SELECT
X
– Program address selection number: 14 ([414] for day) / 15 ([415] for night)/
16 ([416] for lunch)
*
1
Exchange Line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
*
2 Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All exchange lines – Normal
4-50
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 51
4.2
System Programming
[414]-[417]
!
!
• You must select “DISA1”when the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed and if you want to use the internal DISA.
• When you select “UCD”, assign program [520] “UCD Group” to determine which extension group is assigned to the UCD group.
• When you select “DISA1”, “DISA2” and/or “UCD”, assign program [502] “OGM Mode
Selection” to determine which OGM will be used.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct In Line (DIL), Direct Inward System Access (DISA),
Outgoing Message (OGM), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[417] Pause Time
Assigns the length of the pause time. The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code, a host PBX access code programmed in [403] “Host PBX Access
Codes” or a pause code assigned in [311] “Automatic Pause Insertion Codes” or can be manually inserted by the user using the PAUSE button.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
1 7
NEXT
END exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT STORE
(1.5/2.5/
3.5/4.5 sec)
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – 1.5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Host PBX Access
System Programming
4-51
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 52
[418]-[419]
4.2
System Programming
[418] Recall Time
Assigns the length of the recall time. If your system is installed behind a host PBX, External
Feature Access is necessary to obtain its services. To enable it, select the required recall signal sending time for an exchange line.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
1 8
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(80/100/160/
300/600/900/
1200 ms)
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – 100 milliseconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
External Feature Access, Recall
END
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access
Selects which exchange line can be seized automatically when an extension user dials the
Automatic Line Access number (0 or 9) assigned in program [121] “Automatic Exchange
Line Access Number Selection”.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
1 9
NEXT exchange line no.*
( 1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Enable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Automatic Exchange Line Access Number, Outside Calling
END
4-52
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 53
4.2
System Programming
[420]
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
Assigns the required minimum duration of the Calling Party Control (CPC) signal from the
Local Exchange for incoming outside calls. If programmed, the system disconnects the line when the CPC signal is detected.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 0
NEXT
END exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
X
(00···75)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
X
– CPC signal detect time selection number: No. = selection number
Detect time (milliseconds)
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
15
16
17
18
03
04
05
06
No.
00
01
02
Detect time
Disable
22
30
38
46
54
62
70
78
86
94
102
110
118
126
134
142
150
158
No.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Detect time
166
174
182
190
198
206
214
222
230
238
246
254
262
270
278
286
294
302
310
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
53
54
55
56
41
42
43
44
No.
38
39
40
Detect time
318
326
334
342
350
358
366
374
382
390
398
406
414
422
430
438
446
454
462
68
69
70
71
64
65
66
67
72
73
74
75
60
61
62
63
No.
57
58
59
Detect time
470
478
486
494
502
510
518
526
534
542
550
558
566
574
582
590
598
606
614
Default
All exchange lines – Disable (No. 00)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
System Programming
4-53
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 54
[421]-[422]
4.2
System Programming
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Enables or disables the CPC signal detection during an outgoing outside call. If disabled, the CPC signal detection is only activated during an incoming outside call or after call hold.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 1
NEXT
END exchange line no.*
SELECT
(1···6/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
[422] Disconnect Time
Determines the amount of time to send the disconnect signal from the system to the Local
Exchange or host PBX. The time you select must be longer than the requirement of your
Local Exchange or host PBX.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 2
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(0.5/2.0/
4.0 sec)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – 2.0 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Recall
4-54
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 55
4.2
System Programming
[423]
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection
Selects the incoming outside call ringing pattern, Single, Double or Triple, for each exchange line. This is useful for distinguishing private calls from business calls.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
4
2
3
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
STORE
(Single/Double/
Triple)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Double
!
!
☞
• When selecting the ring pattern illustrated above, we recommend that other ring patterns of the system be considered. Namely, please consider the settings of [115] “Extension Ringing
Pattern Selection” and [706] “Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Ringing Pattern Selection
System Programming
4-55
PSQX1708ZA-09E.QX 99.10.15 1:04 PM Page 56
[424]
4.2
System Programming
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
Enables or disables detecting the reverse signal for each exchange line’s polarity from the
Local Exchange when making a call. If enabled, the outside call duration can be determined.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
4
2 4
NEXT exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Polarity Reverse Detection
4-56
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 57
4.2
System Programming
[500]
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection
Selects the destination of an incoming outside call via the DISA feature when you select
“DISA 1” or “DISA 2” in programs [414]-[416] “Exchange Line Mode –Day/Night/Lunch”,
Without AA (auto attendant) or With AA . If you select “With AA”, assign the next program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”.
Without AA: Available destinations are: extension numbers assigned in program
[009] “Extension Number Assignment” and the operator number (0 or 9).
With AA: Available destinations are: numbers available in the “Without AA” mode, and numbers (0 through 9) assigned in program [501].
5 0 0
END NEXT SELECT
(Without AA/
With AA)
STORE
Default
Without AA
!
!
• For example: in the “With AA” mode, if a number is not dialled within the programmed time in [517] “DISA AA Wait Time” after dialling 1, the call is received at the DISA built-in auto attendant number 1.
• In the “With AA” mode, if 0 or 9 is not assigned in program [501], the system recognises them as a the operator number.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System Programming
4-57
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 58
[501]
4.2
System Programming
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
Assigns a maximum of 10 DISA built-in auto attendant numbers when “With AA” is selected in program [500] “DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection”. The extension numbers assigned in program [009] “Extension Number Assignment”, and the extension group numbers assigned in program [600] “Extension Group Assignment” can be assigned as a 1 digit number and used as DISA built-in auto attendant numbers.
5 0 1
NEXT
AA no.
(0···9)
SELECT
(Jack/GRP/
Not Stored)
extension port no.
(01···24) or
extension group no.
(1···8)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
STORE
END
Default
All auto attendant numbers – Not stored
!
!
☞
• If you would like to use the operator number in the “With AA” mode, do not assign auto attendant number(s) which correspond to the operator number (0 or 9).
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4-58
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 59
4.2
System Programming
[502]
[502] OGM Mode Selection
Selects how the 2 outgoing messages (OGM1 and OGM2) are used, MODE1 through
MODE6.
Mode
1
OGM1
DISA1
OGM2
DISA1
2
3
4
5
6
DISA1
UCD
UCD
UCD
UCD
DISA2
UCD
UCD-
END
DISA1
DISA
Description
The system can receive 2 incoming calls via the DISA feature at the same time. This is useful when receiving many calls.
An example: DISA1 is used in the day mode and DISA2 is used in the night mode.
The system can hold up to 2 incoming calls via the UCD feature at the same time until any extension is available.
The system disconnects an incoming call via the UCD feature when the assigned waiting time in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting
Time” expires.
An example: UCD is used in the day mode and DISA1 is used in the night mode.
The system leads an incoming call via the UCD feature to the
DISA feature by OGM2 when the assigned waiting time in
[521] “UCD Busy Waiting Time” expires and “Intercept” is selected in [523] “UCD Busy Mode”.
5 0
2
NEXT
END SELECT
(MODE 1/
2/3/4/5/6)
STORE
Default
MODE1
!
!
• Programs [414]-[416] “Exchange Line Mode – Day/Night/Lunch” are used to assign
“DISA1”, “DISA2” or “UCD” to each exchange line according to this assignment.
• UCD-END is automatically used when “UCD” is assigned in programs [414]-[416],
“Disconnect” is selected in program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”, and “MODE4” is selected in this program.
• DISA is automatically used when “UCD” is assigned in programs [414]-[416], “Intercept” is selected in program [523], and “MODE6” is selected in this program.
• If the optional OGM/FAX Detection card is not installed, this assignment should be
“MODE1”.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM),
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
System Programming
4-59
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 60
[503]-[505]
4.2
System Programming
[503] FAX Connection *
1
Assigns one extension which can receive facsimile data when the system receives a FAX
(CNG) tone via the DISA feature.
5
Default
0
3
NEXT extension port no.
(01···24)
Disable (Not assigned)
STORE
END
!
!
• The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
• To unassign an extension port number, press the CLEAR button in the extension port number step.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Data Line Security, Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
Sets the time from a call being received and answered with the DISA feature.
5 0 4
NEXT
SELECT
(0/3/6/12 sec)
STORE END
Default
3 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM *
1
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting the DTMF signals or FAX (CNG) tone after the DISA outgoing message is completed.
5
Default
0
5
NEXT
SELECT
(0/5/10/15 sec)
STORE
5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
4-60
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 61
4.2
System Programming
[506]-[507]
[506] DISA Busy Mode
Selects the operation when a called extension or all called extensions in an extension group enabled in program [100] “Hunting Group Set” via the DISA feature is/are busy.
Disconnect, Call Waiting or DISA2 is available.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected after the busy tone.
Call Waiting: A call waiting tone is sent to the called extension or first called extension in the hunting group.
DISA2: OGM2 is sent to the caller and the system waits for another destination when the first destination is busy.
5 0
END
Default
6
NEXT
SELECT
(Disconnect/
Call Waiting/
DISA2)
STORE
Disconnect
!
!
☞
• Program [502] “OGM Mode Selection” should be “MODE2”, if “DISA2” was selected in this program.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Outgoing Message (OGM)
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
Selects the operation when a called extension or extension group via the DISA feature does not answer a call within the length of time programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
This is useful for business use. For example, the call is forwarded to the operator or a Voice Processing System automatically.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected. This is useful for users who do not want to forward the call, for example, to a home.
5 0 7
NEXT
END
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
Default
Intercept
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing,
Voice Mail Integration for KX-TVP100
System Programming
4-61
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 62
[508]-[509]
4.2
System Programming
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (
☞ [507] “DISA
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension(s).
5 0
8
END NEXT
SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept
Routing – No Answer feature(☞ [507] “DISA Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time programmed in [508] “DISA Ringing Time before Intercept” expires. If the call is not answered within the programmed time, the call will be disconnected.
5 0 9
END
NEXT
SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
Default
20 seconds
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
4-62
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 63
4.2
System Programming
[510], [513]
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
Selects the operation when the system does not receive either DTMF signals or a FAX
(CNG) tone after a programmed length of time. If the optional card is installed, then use program [505] “DISA Waiting Time after OGM”. If the optional card is not installed, then use program [515] “Intercept Time for Internal DISA”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is directed depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
The destination telephone(s) will ring for the time programmed in
[509] “DISA Ringing Time after Intercept”.
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
5 1 0
END
NEXT
(DISA1/
DISA2)
SELECT
STORE
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
To continue
NEXT
Default
DISA 1 and DISA 2 – Intercept
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Intercept Routing
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection*
1
Assigns the number of times a cyclic tone is detected while the DISA outgoing message is sent so that the system can recognise the end of the DISA call.
5 1
3
NEXT
SELECT
(Disable*/
2/3/4 Times)
STORE
* Disable (Does not detect)
END
Default
4 Times
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA), Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
System Programming
4-63
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 64
[514]-[515]
4.2
System Programming
[514] FAX Tone Detection*
1
Sets the number of times the FAX (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA outgoing message is sent before the system recognises the incoming signal as facsimile data.
5 1
4
END
NEXT
SELECT
(1 Time/2 Times)
STORE
Default
1 Time
!
!
☞
• The extension which can receive facsimile data must be assigned in program [503] “FAX
Connection”
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
Assigns the length of time the system keeps detecting DTMF signals after a call is received at the internal DISA. If the system does not receive DTMF signals within the programmed time, the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [510] “DISA No Dial
Mode”.
5 1 5
NEXT
END
SELECT
(3/6/9 sec)
STORE
Default
3 seconds
!
!
☞
• A cyclic tone and FAX (CNG) tone cannot be detected by the internal DISA.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
4-64
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 65
4.2
System Programming
[516]-[517]
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
Enables or disables each extension to receive an outside call via the DISA feature. If a
DISA call is received at a disabled extension, the DISA caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. For example, it may be convenient to disable the president’s extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
5 1
6
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Enable
!
!
☞
• If a call via the DISA feature is received by an extension group, this program will not work for extensions in that extension group. In this case, disabled extensions will still ring.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
[517] DISA AA Wait Time
Selects the time that the system waits for a second digit entry. If the programmed time expires, the system will assume that the first digit is a DISA built-in auto attendant number, if a number is assigned in program [501] “DISA Built-in Auto Attendant”. For example, if a number is not dialled within the programmed time after dialling 1, the system will assume that “1” is the auto attendant number.
5 1
END
Default
7
NEXT SELECT
(1/2/3/4/5 sec)
STORE
2 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
System Programming
4-65
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 66
[519]-[521]
4.2
System Programming
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time
Assigns the length of time from answering a call with the DISA feature and sending the
DISA outgoing message or a beep. During the assigned length of time, the system will not receive DTMF signals.
5 1
9
NEXT
SELECT
(0/2/4/6 sec)
STORE
Default
0 second
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
END
[520] UCD Group*
1
Assigns one extension group which works as the UCD group.
5 2 0
NEXT extension group no.
(1···8)
STORE
Default
Extension group number 1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time*
1
Assigns the length of time the system holds an incoming outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. When the programmed time expires, the call will be intercepted or disconnected according to program [523] “UCD Busy Mode”.
5
2 1
NEXT waiting time*
SELECT
( min/sec)
STORE
* Waiting time: 1 through 32 (minutes) / 1 through 59 (seconds)
Default
10 minutes
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
END
4-66
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 67
4.2
System Programming
[522]-[523]
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time*
1
Assigns interval time between sending UCD outgoing messages to an incoming outside call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy. The UCD outgoing message is repeated during the time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting Time”.
5 2
2
NEXT
STORE END
SELECT
(30 sec/1/
1.5/2 min)
Default
1 minute
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[523] UCD Busy Mode*
1
Selects the operation when the length of time programmed in [521] “UCD Busy Waiting
Time” expires. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call will be redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible
Ringing Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing feature). The extension which receives a redirected call rings during the length of time programmed in [526] “UCD Ringing Time after Intercept”.
Disconnect: The call will be disconnected immediately.
5 2
3
NEXT
END
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE
Default
Intercept
!
!
• The above-mentioned intercept only occurs when “MODE 3” or “MODE 5” is selected in program [502] “OGM Mode Selection”. If “MODE 4” is selected, the call will be disconnected after the UCD-END outgoing message. If “MODE 6” is selected and
“Intercept” is assigned in this program, the call will go to the DISA and OGM2 will be heard by the caller.
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
System Programming
4-67
PSQX1708ZA-10E.QX 99.10.15 1:06 PM Page 68
[524]-[526]
4.2
System Programming
[524] UCD Intercept Mode*
1
☞
Selects the operation when all extensions in the UCD group do not answer an outside call via the UCD feature within the length of time programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time before Intercept”. Intercept or Disconnect is available.
Intercept: The call is redirected depending on programs [408]-[410] “Flexible Ringing
Assignment–Day/Night/Lunch” (Intercept Routing – No Answer feature).
Disconnect: The call is disconnected.
5 2
4
NEXT
SELECT
(Intercept/
Disconnect)
STORE END
Default
Intercept
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept*
1
☞
Assigns the length of time for the Intercept Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD
Intercept Mode”, Intercept). When the time expires, the system starts to redirect the call to the programmed extension(s).
5 2
5
NEXT SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
END
Default
20 seconds
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept*
1
☞
Assigns the length of time to call the extension(s) where a call is redirected by the Intercept
Routing – No Answer feature (☞ [524] “UCD Intercept Mode”, Intercept) after the time programmed in [525] “UCD Ringing Time before Intercept” expires.
5 2 6
NEXT
SELECT
(10/20/30/
40/60/120 sec)
STORE
END
Default
20 seconds
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercept Routing, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
4-68
System Programming
* 1 : Required only when the optional OGM/FAX Detection
Card is installed.
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 69
4.2
System Programming
[600]-[603]
[600] Extension Group Assignment
Assigns an extension group for each extension. For example: by department or floor.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 0
NEXT extension port no.* 1 extension group no.* 2
(01···24/ )
(1···8)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
*
1
*
2
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Extension group number: 1 through 8
Default
All extension ports – Extension group 1
!
!
☞
• Every extension should belong to an extension group, but cannot belong to more than one group.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Extension Group, Extension Hunting
[601]-[603] Call Barring – Class of Service Assignment —Day/Night/Lunch
Programs a class of service (COS) in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
There are 5 classes of service available for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0
X
(1···3)
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
COS no.
(1···5 )
STORE
To continue
SELECT
X
– Program address selection number: 1 ([601] for day) / 2 ([602] for night)/
3 ([603] for lunch)
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
END
Default
All extension ports – COS-1
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Barring
4-69
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 70
[604]
4.2
System Programming
[604] Extension Name Setting
Assigns a name to each extension which will be displayed when making or receiving an intercom call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 4
NEXT extension port no.
extension name*
(01···24 )
10 characters max.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension name:
Combination Table
Pressing SELECT
(Times)
Keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W m p g j t w
.
+
%
2 q a d
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
-
&
3
Z
B
E
# #
”
$
<Example>
— To enter “Mike”;
1. Press 6 and then press the SELECT button once to enter “M”.
2. Press 4 and then press the SELECT button 6 times to enter “i”.
3. Press 5 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “k”.
4. Press 3 and then press the SELECT button 4 times to enter “e”.
n r h k u x
’
=
@
4 z b e
O
S
I
L
V
Y
:
<
(
5
!
C
F
6
?
c f o s v y l i
;
>
)
!
!
☞
Default
All extension ports – Not stored.
• To erase all letters, press the CLEAR button. To erase 1 letter, press
• Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Intercom Calling
.
4-70
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 71
4.2
System Programming
[605]
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
Selects the account code input mode, Option, Forced, Verify–All or Verify–Toll (Call
Barring), for each extension port. This feature displays the account code of the called or calling party on the SMDR.
Option:
Forced:
The user can enter any account code, if needed.
The user must always enter an account code. The code can be any number.
Verify–All: The user must always enter an assigned account code in program
[310] “Account Codes” to make an outside call.
Verify–Toll (Call Barring): The user can enter an assigned account code in program
[310] to override call barring. The call barring COS numbers 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to the
COS number 2. (The COS numbers 1 and 2 will not be changed.)
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 5
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT STORE
(Option/Forced/
Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Option
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Call Barring Override by Account Codes
System Programming
4-71
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 72
[606]-[607]
4.2
System Programming
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line
Enables or disables transferring an intercom or outside call to any exchange line manually for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 6
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Call Transfer – to Exchange Line, Conference (3-party)
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line
Enables or disables automatically forwarding an incoming intercom or outside call to any exchange line for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0
7
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
END
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Forwarding
4-72
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 73
4.2
System Programming
[608]-[609]
[608] Executive Busy Override
Enables or disables using the Executive Busy Override feature at each extension. If enabled, an extension user can interrupt an established call.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 8
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Executive Busy Override
END
[609] Do Not Disturb Override
Enables or disables using the Do Not Disturb Override feature at each extension. If enabled, an extension user can ring an extension which has set the Do Not Disturb feature.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 0 9
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
System Programming
4-73
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 74
[610]-[611]
4.2
System Programming
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection
Enables or disables a single line telephone (SLT) to be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1
0
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···16/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Parallelled Telephone Connection
[611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine) Extension
Assigns the port number of an extension connected to a telephone answering machine
(TAM) to activate the Call Retrieving from TAM feature.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 1
NEXT extension port no.*
SELECT
(01···24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable (not connected)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Call Pickup
4-74
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 75
4.2
System Programming
[612]-[613]
[612] Room Monitor Assignment
Enables or disables which extension(s) can be monitored using the Room Monitor feature.
6 1 2
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension port no.*
(01···16/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable (Cannot be monitored.)
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Room Monitor
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit Selection
Enables or disables the time limit programmed in [212] “Exchange Line Duration Time
Limit” for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 3
NEXT extension port no.*
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Limited Call Duration
System Programming
4-75
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 76
[614]
4.2
System Programming
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
Enables or disables connecting a single line telephone (SLT) to receive pulse signals for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
6 1 4
NEXT extension port no.*
SELECT
(01···24/ )
(Enable/
Disable)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports – Enable
!
!
• If you select “MODE 1” in program [207] “Recall Timing Range Selection” and “Enable” in this program, the system will distinguish between a pulse signal and hooking depending on the situation. When you select “Disable” in this program, if “1” is dialled during the pulse mode, the system will regard it as hooking and all other numbers will be disregarded.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Recall Button on a Single Line Telephone
4-76
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-11E.QX 99.10.15 1:07 PM Page 77
4.2
System Programming
[615]
[615] LCD Language Assignment
Selects the language, English, Spanish or Portuguese, shown on the LCD display of a proprietary telephone on an extension basis. The selected language is shown during operation and Proprietary Telephone Settings.
6 1 5
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue extension port no.*
(01···16/ )
SELECT STORE
(English/Spanish
Portuguese)
To continue
SELECT
END
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)
Default
All extension ports — English
!
!
☞
• The language used for the SMDR printout is assigned in program [806] “SMDR Language
Assignment”.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Language Selection
System Programming
4-77
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 78
[700]-[702]
4.2
System Programming
[700]-[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch
Enables or disables receiving a call from up to 4 doorphones in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number or
7 X
(00···02)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
port number
doorphone no.* 1
(1···4/ )
#
SELECT extension port no.* 2
SELECT
(01···24/ )
To continue
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
Go to another port number
To continue
Go to another doorphone number
X
– Program address selection number: 00 ([700] for day) / 01 ([701] for night) /
02 ([702] for lunch)
*
*
1
2
Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All doorphones – all extension ports – Enable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call
4-78
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 79
4.2
System Programming
[703]-[705]
[703]-[705] Door Opener Assignment—Day/Night/Lunch
Enables or disables accessing to up to 4 door openers in the day, night and/or lunch modes for each extension.
NEXT
or
PREV To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number or
7 X
(03···05)
NEXT
To continue
Go to next or prev.
port number
door opener no.* 1
(1···4/ )
#
SELECT extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE END
To continue
Go to another port number
To continue
Go to another door opener number
X
– Program address selection number: 03 ([703] for day) / 04 ([704] for night) /
05 ([705] for lunch)
* 1
* 2
Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
Default
All door openers – all extension ports – Disable
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Door Opener
System Programming
4-79
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 80
[706]-[707]
4.2
System Programming
[706] Doorphone Ringing / Tone Pattern Selection
Selects the doorphone ringing pattern, Single, Double, Triple or S-Double.
1 s
Single:
Double:
Triple:
S-Double:
NEXT
7 0 6 doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(Single/Double/
Triple/S-Double)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
!
!
☞
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Default
All doorphones – Triple
• When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone, a tone is heard instead of ringing.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call, Ringing Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
Enables or disables sending a doorphone access tone to a monitored doorphone. If enabled, the access tone is heard from the doorphone when monitoring from a telephone starts.
7 0 7
NEXT doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
☞
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Default
All doorphones – Enable
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call, Room Monitor
4-80
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 81
4.2
System Programming
[708]-[709]
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time
Sets the ringing time when making an intercom call from a doorphone.
7 0 8
NEXT doorphone no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(15/30 sec)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Doorphone number: 1 through 4 / (All doorphones)
Default
All doorphones – 15 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Doorphone Call
[709] Door Opener Time
Assigns the length of the door opener time. The door is unlocked for the assigned period of time.
7 0 9
NEXT door opener no.*
(1···4/ )
SELECT
(1/2/3/4/5/
6/7/8 sec)
STORE
To continue
END
NEXT
or
PREV
* Door opener number: 1 through 4 / (All door openers)
Default
All door openers – 5 seconds
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Door Opener
System Programming
4-81
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 82
[800]
4.2
System Programming
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface (RS-232C).
NL–Code:
(New line)
Selects the code for your printer or personal computer. If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select
“CR”. If not, select “CR+LF”.
Baud Rate: The baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer.
Word Length: The word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
Parity: The parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character. Make your selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Stop Bit: The stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select a value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer.
< Sets the new line code> < Sets the baud rate >
8 0 0
NEXT
SELECT
< Sets the word length >
STORE NEXT SELECT
(CR+LF/CR)* 1
< Sets the parity >
STORE
(150/300/600/
1200/2400/
4800/9600 B)
< Sets the stop bit length >
NEXT SELECT
STORE
NEXT SELECT
(7/8 bits) (Mark/Space/
Even/Odd/
None*
2
)
STORE
NEXT SELECT STORE
(1 bit/2 bits)
END
*
1
*
2
CR+LF (Carriage Return + Line Feed) / CR (Carriage Return)
Select “None” when the error checking function is not required from the printer.
Default New line Baud rate Word length Parity
CR + LF 9600 baud 8 bits Mark
Stop bit length
1 bit
!
!
• To return to the previous mode, press
PREV
• The following combinations are invalid.
Parity
Mark
Space
Space
Word length
8
8
8
2
1
2 instead of
Stop bit length
NEXT
.
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone is heard.
☞
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-82
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 83
4.2
System Programming
[801]-[802]
[801] SMDR Parameter
!
!
☞
Assigns the following 2 printing parameters to match the SMDR output with the paper size used in the printer.
Page Length: Sets the number of lines per page.
Skip Perf: Sets the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
(Perforation)
< Sets the page length >
8 0 1
NEXT page length
(4···99)
STORE
< Sets the skip perforation >
NEXT skip perforation
(0···95)
STORE END
Default
Page length – 66 lines
Skip perforation – 0 line
<Example>
Standard paper for the SMDR
(11 inches)
• The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
skip perforation
66 lines page length
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) machine perforation
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
Determines which calls will produce an SMDR printout.
8 0 2
< Sets an outgoing call >
NEXT
SELECT
(On/Off/Toll)* 1
STORE
< Sets an incoming call >
NEXT SELECT
(On/Off)* 2
STORE
*
1 Outgoing: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing) / Toll (Print toll calls only)
*
2
Incoming: On (Print all calls) / Off (No printing)
END
!
!
☞
Default
Outgoing calls / Incoming calls – On
• If “Outgoing; Toll” is selected, only calls which are checked in programs [302]–[305] “Call
Barring – Classes 2 through 5 Denied Codes” and are allowed, are printed out.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-83
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 84
[803]-[804]
4.2
System Programming
[803] Secret Speed Dialling / One-Touch Dialling Printing
Selects to print or not print (on SMDR) secret dialling numbers stored in program [001]
“System Speed Dialling Entry” and/or stored in One-Touch Dialling even though they are not displayed on the LCD.
8 0
3
NEXT
END SELECT
(No Printing/
Printing)
STORE
Default
No printing
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Secret Dialling, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[804] System Data Dump
Starts and stops printing the assigned data. All or a specific area of current systemprogrammed data is printed out. The areas are as follows.
All Para: Prints out all data.
System Para: Prints out all data except for the following 4 parameters.
CO Para: Prints out programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424].
Ext Para: If the extension is a proprietary telephone, programs [102], [516] [600] through [613] and [615] will be printed out. The assigned data on the PF
(Programmable Feature) buttons and line keys will also be printed out.
If the extension is a single line telephone, programs [102], [516] and [600] through [614] will be printed out. The assigned Personal Speed Dialling numbers are also printed out.
DSS Para: Prints out the assigned data in the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console.
Speed Dial: Prints out the System Speed Dialling numbers and names assigned in programs [001] and [011].
Stop Output : Stops printing.
< To select All parameters, System parameter,
Speed dial and/or Stop output. >
8 0 4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
To continue
END
4-84
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 85
4.2
System Programming
[804]-[805]
< To select the CO (exchange line) parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
exchange line
(1···6/ )
STORE
To continue
END
< To select the Extension parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
< To select the DSS parameter. >
8 0 4
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial/
Stop Output)
DSS console no.* 3
(1···2/ )
STORE
To continue
END
*
1
*
2
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
*
3 DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)
!
!
☞
• This program and [999] “System Data Clear” are not included.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
!
!
☞
Selects printing out the account code stored in program [310] “Account Codes”, or just the index of the account code on SMDR printout.
8 0 5
NEXT
SELECT
(CODE/
INDEX)
STORE
END
Default
CODE
• The printing of the index of the account code only occurs if the extension user entered their account code in the “Verify-All” or “Verify-Toll (Call Barring)” input mode as programmed in [605] “Account Code Entry Mode”.
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Account Code Entry, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-85
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 86
[806], [998]
4.2
System Programming
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
Selects the language, English, Spanish or Portuguese, used for an SMDR printout.
END
8
Default
0 6
English
NEXT
SELECT
(English/Spanish
Portuguese)
STORE
☞
• Feature References
Section 3, Features
Language Selection, Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
[998] ROM Version
Confirms the system ROM version.
9 9 8
NEXT END
Display example:
Y551JA 990620 (E)
Version Date
4-86
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 87
4.2
System Programming
[999]
[999] System Data Clear
Resets all or a specific area of the current assigned data to the default settings. The areas are as follows.
All
Para
: Resets all data to the default settings.
System Para: Resets all data to the default settings except for the data of the following
CO Para:
4 parameters.
Resets programs [400] through [403] and [405] through [424] to the default settings on an exchange line basis.
Resets programs [102], [516] and [600] through [615] to the default Ext Para: settings on an extension basis.
DSS Para: Resets the assigned data on the DSS buttons and PF buttons on the DSS console.
Speed Dial : Resets the System Speed Dialling numbers (00 through 99) assigned in program [001].
< To select All, System parameter and/or Speed Dial. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
To continue
END
< To select the CO (exchange line) parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
exchange line no.* 1
(1···6/ )
STORE
To continue
END
< To select the Extension parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
extension port no.* 2
(01···24/ )
STORE
To continue
END
< To select the DSS parameter. >
9 9 9
NEXT SELECT
STORE
(All/System/CO/Ext/
DSS Para/Speed Dial)
DSS console no.* 3
(1···2/ )
STORE
To continue
END
*
1
*
2
Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Extension port number: 01 through 24 / (All extension ports)
*
3 DSS console number: 1 through 2 / (Both DSS console numbers)
!
!
☞
• This program and [804] “System Data Dump” are not included.
• Feature Reference
Section 3, Features
System Data Default Set
System Programming
4-87
PSQX1708ZA-12E.QX 99.10.15 1:09 PM Page 88
4-88
System Programming
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 1
Section 5
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 2
5.1
Default Values
Address Program
[000] Date and Time Setting
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
[002] System Password
[003] DSS Console Port Assignment
[004] Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS
Console
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing
Mode
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
[008] Operator Assignment
[009] Extension Number Assignment
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan
[100] Hunting Group Set
[101] Hunting Type
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100
[103] DTMF Integration for KX-TVP100
[104] Hold Mode Selection
[105] Conference Tone
[106] External Paging Access Tone
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
[108] Recall Mode for a Locked Extension
[109] CO Indicator Assignment
[110] Recall Key Mode
[111] Hold Music Selection
[112] DSS Console Indication Mode
[115] Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
[116] Conference Pattern Selection
[117] Call Pickup Tone
Default
’98 Jan. 1 Thu 12:00 AM
All speed dialling numbers – Not stored
1234
All DSS Consoles — Disable
DSS1 – Disable, DSS2 – Disable
With Transfer
Manual
Every day of the week
— Day – 9:00 AM / Night – 5:30 PM /
Lunch-S – None / Lunch-E – None
Jack-01
Port 01 through 24 = Extn. 201 through 224
12 HOUR
All System Speed Dialling numbers – Not stored
All codes — Not stored
All extension groups — Disable
All extension groups – Terminate
All 4 extension ports — Disable
Disable
Hold-1
Enable
Enable
All DTMF receivers — Enable
Disable
Enable
MODE 1
External
Enable
Single
5-party C-2 E-5
Enable
5-2
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 3
5.1
Default Values
Address Program
[118] Pulse Restriction
[119] Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion
[120] Bell Frequency
[121] Automatic Exchange Line Access Number
Selection
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line
Access
[123] Break Ratio
[124] SLT Ringing Mode Selection
[125] Call Barring Check for and #
[126] DSS Off-Hook Mode
[127] Pickup Group Set
[200] Hold Recall Time
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding Start Time
[203] Pickup Dial Delay Time
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
[206] Dialling Start Time
[207] Recall Timing Range Selection
[208] Interdigit Time
[210] DTMF Time
[211] No Dial Disconnection
[212] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit
[213] Bell Off Detection
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
[301] Call Barring — System Speed Dialling
Boundary Class
[302]–[305] Call Barring — Classes 2 through 5
Denied Codes
[306] Call Barring — Exception Codes
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
[310] Account Codes
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Enable
Disable
25 Hz
Dial 9
Disable
Default
MODE 1
MODE 2
Enable
Enable
All extension groups – Disable
30 seconds
30 seconds
15 seconds delay
3 seconds
10 seconds after dialling
0 millisecond
MODE 1
20 seconds
MODE 1
Enable
10 minutes
3 seconds
All codes – Not stored
Boundary Class-1
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
Appendix
5-3
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 4
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[312
]
Call Barring — Extension Lock Boundary Class Disable
[350] ARS Selection
[351]-[354] Routes 1 through 4 Selection Codes
(Leading Digits)
[355]-[358] Routes 1 through 4 Exception Codes
All exchange lines – Disable
All codes – Not stored
All codes – Not stored
121 (British Telecom Line access code) [359] 1st Carrier Selection Code
(BT Line Access Code)
[360] ARS Modification — Removed Digits
[361] ARS Modification — Added Number
[362] ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
All routes – 0 (No deletion)
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored
Tone 1
[363] ARS Interdigit Time
[364] ARS Trunk Grorup
[381]-[384] Routes 1 through 4 Authorisation
Codes
[385]-[388] Routes 1 through 4 Itemised Bill
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment
[400] Exchange Line Connection Assignment
5 seconds
All routes – (All trunk (TRK) groups)
All exchange lines – Not stored
All exchange lines – Disable
Extension ports 01 through 24 – 201 through 224
All exchange lines – Connect
[401] Dial Mode
[402] Pulse Speed Selection
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
[404] Trunk Group Assignment
[405]–[407]
[408]–[410]
[411]–[413]
[414]–[416]
Flexible Outward Dialling
Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
Flexible Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
Delayed Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
Exchange Line Mode
— Day/Night/Lunch
[417] Pause Time
[418] Recall Time
[419] Automatic Designated Exchange Line Access
All exchange lines – DTMF Mode
All exchange lines – Low Speed
All exchange lines – Not stored
CO1 — TRK GRP-1; CO2 — TRK GRP-2;
CO3 — TRK GRP-3; CO4 — TRK GRP-4;
CO5 — TRK GRP-5; CO6 — TRK GRP-6;
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All exchange lines – all extension ports – Immdtly
— Day/Night/Lunch
All exchange lines — Normal
— Day/Night/Lunch
All exchange lines — 1.5 seconds
All exchange lines – 100 milliseconds
All exchange lines — Enable
5-4
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 5
5.1
Default Values
Address Program
[420] Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
[422] Disconnect Time
[423] Exchange Line Ringing Pattern Selection
[424] Reverse (Polarity) Circuit Assignment
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
[502] OGM Mode Selection
[503] FAX Connection
[504] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[505] DISA Waiting Time after OGM
[506] DISA Busy Mode
[507] DISA Intercept Mode
[508] DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
[509] DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
[510] DISA No Dial Mode
[513] Cyclic Tone Detection
[514] Fax Tone Detection
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
[517] DISA AA Wait Time
[519] DISA OGM Mute Time
[520] UCD Group
[521] UCD Busy Waiting Time
[522] UCD OGM Message Interval Time
[523] UCD Busy Mode
[524] UCD Intercept Mode
[525] UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
[600] Extension Group Assignment
[601]–[603] Call Barring – Class of Service
Assignment — Day/Night/Lunch
Default
All exchange lines – 00 (Disable)
All exchange lines – Disable
All exchange lines – 2.0 seconds
All exchange lines – Double
All exchange lines – Disable
Without AA
All numbers — Not Stored
MODE 1
Disable
3 seconds
5 seconds
Disconnect
Intercept
20 seconds
20 seconds
DISA1 and DISA2 — Intercept
4 Times
1 Time
3 seconds
All extension ports — Enable
2 seconds
0 second
Group – 1
10 minutes
1 minute
Intercept
Intercept
20 seconds
20 seconds
All extension ports — EXT GRP-1
All extension ports — COS-1
— Day/Night/Lunch
Appendix
5-5
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 6
5.1
Default Values
Address Program Default
[604] Extension Name Setting
[605] Account Code Entry Mode
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line
[608] Executive Busy Override
[609] Do Not Disturb Override
[610] Parallelled Telephone Connection
All extension ports – Not stored
All extension ports – Option
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable [611] TAM (Telephone Answering Machine)
Extension
[612] Room Monitor Assignment
[613] Exchange Line Duration Time Limit
Selection
[614] Internal Pulse Detection
[615] LCD Language Assignment
[700]–[702] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Disable
All extension ports – Enable
All extension ports – English
All doorphones — all extension ports – Enable
— Day/Night/Lunch
[703]–[705] Door Opener Assignment
— Day/Night/Lunch
[706] Doorphone Ringing/Tone Pattern Selection
[707] Doorphone Access Tone Selection
[708] Doorphone Ringing Time
All door openers – all extension ports – Disable
— Day/Night/Lunch
All doorphones — Triple
[709] Door Opener Time
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
[801] SMDR Parameter
All door openers — 5 seconds
New line code = CR+LF; Baud rate = 9600;
Word length = 8; Parity = Mark; Stop bit = 1
Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for
Printing
[803] Secret Speed Dialling/One Touch Dialling
Printing
All doorphones — Enable
All doorphones — 15 seconds
Outgoing calls – On; Incoming calls – On
No printing
[805] SMDR Account Code Selection
[806] SMDR Language Assignment
CODE
English
5-6
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 7
5.2
Specifications
System Capacity
Control Method
Switching
Power Supplies
Dialling
Intercom Paths
Connector
Extension Connection Cable
SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording)
Extension Loop Limit
Minimum Leakage Resistance
Maximum Number of Extension
Instruments per Line
Ring Voltage
Local Exchange Loop Limit
Environmental Requirements
Recall Timing Range
Ability To Recognise Further
Digits
Exchange Lines: 3 max. (6 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion
Card)
Extensions : 8 max. (24 max. with 3-CO Line & 8 Ext Expansion
Card and 8 SLT Extension Expansion Card)
CPU: 16 bit CPU
Control ROM: 4 Mbit, Control RAM: 1 Mbit
Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch
Primary: 230 V AC – 240 V AC, 50 Hz (0.5 A)
Secondary: Circuit Volt (+5 V, +26 V)
Dial Pulse (DP):10 pps, 20 pps
Tone (DTMF) Dialling, DTMF–DP
4
Exchange Lines : 2-pin Modular Connector (RJ11)
Extensions/Doorphone: 4-pin Modular Connector
Pager/Music Source : EIAJ RC-6701 A plug (two-conductor, ø 3.5 mm in diameter)
KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 . . . . . . .2 pair wire (A, B, H, L)
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 pair wire (A, B)
Interface : Serial Interface (RS-232C) (D-SUB, 9-pin)
Output Equipment: Printer
Detail Recording : Date, Time, Extension Number, Exchange Line
Number, Dialled Number, Call Duration, Account
Code
KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Ω
Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
Ω including set
Doorphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Ω
15 000
Ω
1 for a KX-T7020 / KX-T7130 / KX-T7050 or single line telephone
2 for by parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone
80 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load
1 600
Ω max.
0 ˚C – 40 ˚C, 10 % – 90% relative humidity
80 ms – 1 000 ms
The KX-TA624 is capable of accepting and acting upon routing information received from a proprietary telephone for 10 seconds, after the latest routing information has been received.
(Satisfies BS6450:Part 1 1993 Clause 13.5.)
Appendix
5-7
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 8
5.2
Specifications
Maximum associated cable loss for EXTN. port
Port to port loss
Send and receive loudness ratings on port to port basis
Extension (1AS) port
PT: Max cable loss 0.34 dB (140 m max for ø 0.5 mm)
SLT: Max cable loss 0.87 dB (698 m max for ø 0.5 mm)
Loss across switch, PAS
→ 1AS Loss=1.13 dB (Not through–fed system)
Receive loudness rating (PAS → 1AS) : -6 dB (0km)
3 ringers can be supported with extension wiring up to 698 m.
Notes
• Extension ports 01 through 24 may be used for off premise extensions in which case cabling would be required by BS 6701:Part 1 1986 to be equipped with over voltage protection.
• When using separately approved extension telephones, the best overall performance of the PBX system will be obtained by using extension telephones of impedance class A clause 4.3.2.1. of BS 6305:1982.
Port Type Classification
Port Name
Extn. Port**
PSTN Port**
Paging Port (output)*
Ext. Music Port (input)*
Doorphone Port*
Door Opener Port
EIA (RS-232C) Port
Brief Description
Connect to PT, SLT
Connect to Network
External Paging
External Music
Connect to KX-T30865
Door Opener
Connect to PC, Printer
4E
4F
4E
1 AS
PAS
4F
4F
Port Type
* These ports do not respond to address signalling.
** These ports provide DTMF and Loop Disconnect Signalling.
Port Types between which Call Paths can be established
To
From
Extn.
PSTN
Paging
Ext. Music
Doorphone
Door Opener
EIA (RS-232C)
Extn.
PSTN
A
X
X
A
A
X
A
A
A
X
A
X
X
X
Paging
X
X
X
A
X
X
A
Ext.
Music
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
X
Door-
Phone
A
X
X
X
N/A
X
X
Door
Opener
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
EIA
(RS-232C)
X
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
A: Allowed X: Not allowed N/A: Not applicable.
5-8
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 9
5.2
Specifications
Lines, Cards, Extension Equipment
Item
Service Units
Exchange lines
Extension ports
Extension Terminals
3-CO Line and 8 Ext Expansion Card
8 SLT Extension Expansion Card
OGM/FAX Detection Card
Doorphone/Door Opener Card
Doorphones
Door Openers
External Pager
External Music Source
DSS Consoles
System Data
Item
Operator
System Speed Dialling
One Touch Dialling
Personal Speed Dialling
Call Park areas
Absent Messages
Call Barring Classes
Extension Groups
Message Waitings
Max. Quantity
1
6
24
1
1
40
1
1
4
4
1
1
2
Max. Quantity
1
100
24 per extension
(Proprietary telephone)
10 per extension
10
6
5
8
8 per extension
Appendix
5-9
PSQX1708ZA-13E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 10
5-10
Appendix
PSQX1708ZA-14E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 1
Section 6
Troubleshooting
PSQX1708ZA-14E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 2
6.1
While Installing
Extension does not operate.
PROBLEM
Improper reset operation.
PROBABLE CAUSE
Something is wrong with the printed circuit board
(Extension Card).
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Exchange the printed circuit board with another printed circuit board.
Something is wrong with the connection between the system and extension.
Take the extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord. If the telephone works correctly, the connection between the system and the extension must be repaired.
A telephone with an A-A1 relay is connected.
Use a 2 wire cord.
Set the A-A1 relay switch on the telephone to the “OUT” or “OFF” position.
Something is wrong with the extension.
Take the extension and plug it into another extension port that is working. If the telephone does not work, replace the phone.
Turn the Power Switch “OFF” and then “ON”.
Noise during external paging.
Volume distortion from external music source.
Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier.
Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier. A short shielded cable is recommended.
Excessive input level from external music source.
Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source.
Speed Dialling or
One-Touch Dialling does not function.
Wrong programming.
Enter an exchange line access number (9 or 0, 81 through 86) in programming.
A proprietary telephone connected to extension ports
01 through 08, 09 through
16, or 17 through 24 does not operate, but a single line telephone operates.
An extension (H, L) port 01 through 08, 09 through 16, or 17 through 24 may have been shorted.
Turn the Power Switch “OFF”.
Fix the shorted part, then turn the
Power Switch “ON”.
6-2
Troubleshooting
PSQX1708ZA-14E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 3
6.2
While Connecting
Can you dial an extension?
No
Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:
CAUSE
A/B is connected to H/L.
H •
A •
B •
L •
KX-TA624
• H
• A
• B
• L
Extension
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord
(the inner 2 wires are for A/B and the outer 2 wires are for
H/L).
Connection between the system and a single line telephone:
CAUSE
A/B is connected to H/L.
H •
A •
B •
L •
KX-TA624
•
• A
•
• B
Extension
Use the correct cord
(the inner 2 wires are for
A/B).
SOLUTION
Yes
Connection between the system and a single line telephone that is polaritysensitive:
CAUSE
“A” is connected to “B”.
Reverse the connections of
A/B.
SOLUTION
H •
A •
B •
L •
KX-TA624
•
• A
•
• B
Extension
Can you dial out using an exchange line?
No
Connection between the Local Exchange and the system:
•
•
CAUSE
Exchange lines are connected to H/L.
Exchange line
•
• A
•
• B
KX-TA624
SOLUTION
Reconnect the exchange lines to A/B using 2-conductor wiring.
Troubleshooting
6-3
PSQX1708ZA-14E.QX 99.10.15 1:11 PM Page 4
6.3
While Operating
PROBLEM
When using the speakerphone with a proprietary telephone,
KX-T7130, nothing is heard.
The unit does not ring.
PROBABLE CAUSE
The HANDSET/HEADSET selector on the KX-T7130 is set to the “HEADSET” position.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Set the HANDSET/HEADSET selector to the “HANDSET” position.
During a power failure, the extension connected to port number 01 or 09 does not operate.
A proprietary telephone is connected to the port.
Making an outside call cannot be performed.
The Ringer Volume
Selector is set to “OFF”.
The corresponding line key does not exist on the proprietary telephone.
Set to “HIGH” or “LOW”.
Disconnect the proprietary telephone and connect a single line telephone.
Program the line key. See the Flexible
Button Assignment.
(
☞ Operating Instructions,
1.2 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customising the Buttons on Your
Telephone”)
A tone type single line telephone (SLT) user cannot make a call.
There may be something wrong with a DTMF receiver.
1. Select “Enable” for DTMF receiver 1 and “Disable” for DTMF receiver 2 in program [107].
2. Make a call using a tone type SLT connected to one of extension ports
01–08.
3. If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by
DTMF receiver 1. If the call can be made, go to step 4.
4. Try DTMF receiver 2. Select
“Disable” for DTMF receiver 1 and
“Enable” for DTMF receiver 2 in program [107], and make another call.
If you cannot make the call, the problem may have been caused by
DTMF receiver 2. If the call can be made, go to step 5.
5. Check the other 4 DTMF receivers in the same way. Refer to program
[107].
6-4
Troubleshooting
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 1
Section 7
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 2
7 Programming Tables
Default
Change
Year
(00 – 99)
’98
Month
(Jan. – Dec.)
Jan.
[000] Date and Time Setting
Day
(1 – 31)
1
Day of the week
(Sun – Sat)
Thu
Hour
(1 – 12)
12
Minute
(00 – 59)
00
AM / PM
AM
Default
[002] System Password
Parameter: 4 digits, 0 – 9
1 2 3 4
Selection
Default
DSS 1
DSS 2
[003]
DSS Console Port Assignment
DSS console port no. (02…16) / Disable
All: Disable
[004]
Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console
Paired telephone port no. (01…16) / Disable
DSS 1 – Disable / DSS 2 – Disable
[005] One-Touch Transfer Using a DSS Button
With Transfer
Without Transfer
Default
✓
Selection
[006] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Changing Mode
Manually
Automatically
Default
✓
Selection
Day
Night
Lunch-S
Lunch-E
Default
Every day
9:00 AM
5:30 PM
None
None
[007] Time (Day/Night/Lunch) Service Start Time
Every day Sun.
Mon.
Tue.
Change
Wed.
Thu.
Fri.
Sat.
[008] Operator Assignment
Operator
Default
Jack-01
Port no.
[010] LCD Time Display Selection
12 HOUR
24 HOUR
Default
✓
Selection
7-2
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 3
7
SPD no.
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
19
20
21
22
15
16
17
18
35
36
37
38
39
31
32
33
34
11
12
13
14
07
08
09
10
Default
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Programming Tables
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
Telephone number (32 digits max.)
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
Name (16 characters max.)
All: Not stored
(Continued)
Programming Tables
7-3
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 4
7
SPD no.
67
68
69
70
63
64
65
66
59
60
61
62
55
56
57
58
75
76
77
78
79
71
72
73
74
51
52
53
54
47
48
49
50
Default
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Programming Tables
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
Telephone number (32 digits max.)
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
Name (16 characters max.)
All: Not stored
(Continued)
7-4
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 5
7
SPD no.
91
92
93
94
87
88
89
90
Default
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
95
96
97
98
99
Programming Tables
[001] System Speed Dialling Entry
Telephone number (32 digits max.)
[011] System Speed Dialling Name Setting
Name (16 characters max.)
All: Not stored
Programming Tables
7-5
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 6
7
CODE no.
Default: All
50
51
52
53
54
Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
Extension jack no.
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
[009] Extension Number Assignment
Plan 1
✓
218
219
220
221
214
215
216
217
222
223
224
210
211
212
213
206
207
208
209
Extension no. (200…299)
Default
201
Change
202
203
204
205
Plan 2
218
219
220
221
214
215
216
217
222
223
224
210
211
212
213
206
207
208
209
Extension no. (100…499)
Default
201
Change
202
203
204
205
Plan 3
38
39
40
41
34
35
36
37
42
43
44
30
31
32
33
26
27
28
29
Extension no. (10…49)
Default
21
Change
22
23
24
25
[012] Alternative Feature Numbering Plan
Feature no. (10 digits max.) CODE no.
Not stored
55
56
57
58
59
Feature no. (10 digits max.)
7-6
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 7
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Disable
Enable
Default
All
✓
[100] Hunting Group Set
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
[101] Hunting Type
Selection
Terminate
Circular
Default
All
✓
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Selection
Disable
Enable
[102] Voice Mail Port for KX-TVP100
Default
All
✓
Extn. port no. (07, 08, 15, 16, : all)
07 08 15 16
Default
All
✓
[107] DTMF Receiver Check
1
DTMF receiver no. (1…6)
2 3 4 5 6
Selection
Default
Change
[103] DTMF
Integration for
KX-TVP100
Enable Disable
✓
Hold-1
✓
[104]
Hold Mode Selection
Hold-2 Hold-3
[105]
Conference Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
[106] External
Paging Access Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
Selection
Default
Change
[108] Recall Mode for a
Locked Extension
Enable Disable
✓
[109] CO Indicator
Assignment
Enable
✓
Disable
[110]
Recall Key Mode
MODE 1
✓
MODE 2
Selection
Default
Change
[111]
Hold Music Selection
External
✓
Tone
[112] DSS Console
Indication Mode
Enable
✓
Disable
Programming Tables
7-7
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 8
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
[115] Extension Ringing
Pattern Selection
Single
✓
Double Triple
3-Party
C-0 E-3
3-Party
C-1 E-3
[116]
Conference Pattern Selection
3-Party
C-2 E-3
5-Party
C-2 E-5
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[117]
Call Pickup Tone
Enable
✓
Disable
[118]
Pulse Restriction
Enable
✓
Disable
[119] Redialling after
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Enable Disable
✓
[120]
Bell Frequency
20 Hz 25 Hz
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[121] Automatic Exchange Line
Access Number Selection
Dial 0 Dial 9
✓
[122] Automatic Rotation for Exchange Line Access
Enable Disable
✓
Selection
Default
Change
MODE 1
✓
[123]
Break Ratio
MODE 2
[124] SLT Ringing
Mode Selection
MODE 1 MODE 2
✓
[125] Call Barring
Check for and #
Enable
✓
Disable
[126] DSS
Off-Hook Mode
Enable
✓
Disable
Selection
Disable
Enable
Default
All
✓
[127] Pickup Group Set
Extension group no. (1…8, : all)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Selection
Default
Change
30 sec
✓
1 min
[200] Hold Recall Time
1.5 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min Disable
Selection
Default
Change
[201]
Transfer Recall Time
15 sec 30 sec
✓
1 min 2 min
Call Forwarding Start Time
5 sec
[202]
10 sec 15 sec
✓
20 sec
[203]
Pickup Dial Delay Time
1 sec 2 sec 3 sec
✓
4 sec
7-8
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 9
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
5 sec 10 sec
✓
[204] Call Duration Count Start Time
15 sec 20 sec 25 sec 30 sec 35 sec 40 sec 45 sec 50 sec Instantly
Selection
Default
Change
0 ms
✓
[206]
Dialling Start Time
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms 1250 ms 1500 ms
Selection
Default
Change
MODE 1
✓
[207]
Recall Timing Range Selection
[208]
Interdigit Time
MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 5 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec
✓
CODE no.
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Selection
Default
Change
[210]
DTMF Time
MODE 1
✓
MODE 2
[211] No Dial
Disconnection
Enable
✓
Disable
[212] Exchange Line
Duration Time Limit
1…32 minutes
10 minutes
3 sec
✓
[213]
Bell Off Detection
6 sec 12 sec
[300] Carrier Excepted Code Assignment
Carrier code (10 digits max.) CODE no.
Not stored
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
12
13
14
Carrier code (10 digits max.)
Selection
Default
Change
[301] Call Barring — System Speed Dialling Boundary Class
Class-1
✓
Class-2 Class-3 Class-4 Class-5
Programming Tables
7-9
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 10
7 Programming Tables
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
[302] Call Barring
– Class 2 Denied Codes
[303] Call Barring
– Class 3 Denied Codes
[304] Call Barring
– Class 4 Denied Codes
Telephone no. (11 digits)
All: Not stored
[305] Call Barring
– Class 5 Denied Codes
7-10
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 11
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[306] Call Barring – Exception Codes
Telephone no. (11 digits)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Telephone no. (11 digits)
Programming Tables
7-11
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 12
10
11
12
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
7 Programming Tables
CODE no.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
[309] Emergency Dial Number Set
Emergency no. (11 digits max.)
Code-01 = 999, Code-02 = 112, Other codes = Not stored
Account code (4 digits)
[310] Account Codes
CODE no.
All: Not stored
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
Account code (4 digits)
7-12
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 13
7
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
CODE no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
Programming Tables
[311] Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Pause code (7 digits max.) CODE no.
All: Not stored
37
38
39
40
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
Pause code (7 digits max.)
[312] Call Barring – Extension Lock Boundary Class
Default
✓
Change
Disable
COS-2
COS-3
COS-4
COS-5
Selection
Enable
Disable
Default
All
[350] ARS Selection
1
Exchange line no. (1…6, : All)
2 3 4 5 6
✓
Programming Tables
7-13
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 14
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[351] Route 1 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
7-14
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 15
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[352] Route 2 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Programming Tables
7-15
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 16
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[353] Route 3 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
7-16
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 17
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[354] Route 4 Selection Codes (Leading Digits)
Area code no. (7 digits max.) Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Programming Tables
7-17
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 18
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[355] Route 1 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
7-18
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 19
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[356] Route 2 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
Programming Tables
7-19
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 20
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[357] Route 3 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
7-20
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 21
7
26
27
28
29
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
06
07
08
09
Code no.
Default
01
02
03
04
05
34
35
36
37
30
31
32
33
38
39
40
Programming Tables
[358] Route 4 Exception Codes
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
73
74
75
76
69
70
71
72
77
78
79
80
65
66
67
68
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
Code no.
All: Not stored
41
42
43
44
49
50
51
52
45
46
47
48
Area code no. (7 digits max.)
Programming Tables
7-21
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 22
7 Programming Tables
[359] 1st Carrier Selection Code (BT Line Access Code)
Selection
Default
Change
1st carrier access code (4 digits max.)
121 (British Telecom Line access code)
Route no.
Default
1
2
3
4
[360] ARS Modification
– Removed Digits
Deleted digits
(0…9)
All routes – 0
[361] ARS Modification
– Added Number
Added no. : 20 digits max.
(0…9, , #)
Route 1 = 131, Other routes = Not stored
[364]
ARS Trunk Group
Trunk (TRK) group no.
(1…6, )
1 2 3 4 5 6
All routes –
Selection
Default
Change
[362]
ARS Dial Tone Pattern Selection
Disable Tone 1
✓
Tone 2 Tone 3
[363]
ARS Interdigit Time
1…20 seconds
5 seconds
Exchange line no.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
[381] Route 1
Authorisation Code
[382] Route 2
Authorisation Code
[383] Route 3
Authorisation Code
Authorisation code : 19 digits max. (0…9)
All: Not stored
[384] Route 4
Authorisation Code
7-22
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 23
7 Programming Tables
Exchange line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
[385]
Route 1 Itemised Bill
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[386]
Route 2 Itemised Bill
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[387]
Route 3 Itemised Bill
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[388]
Route 4 Itemised Bill
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
Extension port no.
08
09
10
11
12
13
Default
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
[389] Itemised Bill Code Assignment
Itemised bill code : 3 digits max. (0…9)
Extension port no.
Itemised bill code : 3 digits max. (0…9)
Extension ports 01 through 24 = 201 through 224
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Exchange line no.
[400] Exchange Line
Connection Assignment
Connect
✓
Selection
No Connect
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
DTMF
✓
[401] Dial Mode
Selection
Pulse Call Blocking
[402] Pulse
Speed Selection
Low Speed
✓
Selection
High Speed
Programming Tables
7-23
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 24
7 Programming Tables
Exchange line no.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
[403] Host PBX Access Codes
Access codes
(1 or 2 digits, 8 different codes max.)
All: Not stored
[404] Trunk Group
Assignment
Trunk group no. (1…6)
Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
Change
[405] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Day
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
(All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
7-24
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 25
7 Programming Tables
[406] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Night
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
* (All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-25
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 26
7 Programming Tables
[407] Flexible Outward Dialling Assignment — Lunch
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
(All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
7-26
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 27
7 Programming Tables
[408] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Day
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
(All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-27
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 28
7 Programming Tables
[409] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Night
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
(All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Enable Disable Enable Disable
✓ ✓
7-28
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 29
7 Programming Tables
[410] Flexible Ringing Assignment — Lunch
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
(All)
Selection
Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable Enable
✓ ✓
Disable Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-29
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 30
7 Programming Tables
[411] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Day
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
I
✓
(All)
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30
7-30
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 31
7 Programming Tables
[412] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Night
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)
(All)
I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30
Programming Tables
7-31
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 32
7 Programming Tables
[413] Delayed Ringing Assignment — Lunch
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Exchange line 1 Exchange line 2 Exchange line 3 Exchange line 4 Exchange line 5 Exchange line 6
Selection (I: Immediately, 10: 10 seconds delay, 20: 20 seconds delay, 30: 30 seconds delay)
(All)
I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30 I
✓
10 20 30
7-32
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 33
7 Programming Tables
Exchange line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
N
✓
[414] Exchange Line Mode
— Day
[415] Exchange Line Mode
— Night
[416] Exchange Line Mode
— Lunch
Selection — N: Normal, DIL + Extension port no. (01…24), D1: DISA1, D2: DISA2, U: UCD
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U N
✓
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U N
✓
DIL Extn. no. D1 D2 U
Exchange line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
[417]
Pause Time
1.5
✓
Selection (seconds)
2.5
3.5
4.5
80 100
✓
[418]
Recall Time
Selection (milliseconds)
160 300 600 900 1200
Exchange line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
[419] Automatic Designated
Exchange Line Access
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
[420] Calling Party
Control (CPC) Signal
Selection: 00 (Disable),
00 (22 msec)…75 (614 msec)
00 (Disable)
[421] CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Enable
Selection
Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-33
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 34
7 Programming Tables
Exchange line no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
5
6
[422]
Disconnect Time
0.5
Selection (seconds)
2.0
✓
4.0
[423] Exchange Line
Ringing Pattern Selection
Single
Selection
Double
✓
Triple
[424] Reverse (Polarity)
Circuit Assignment
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[500] DISA Incoming Dialling Mode Selection
Selection
Default
Change
Without AA
✓
With AA
[501] DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
Selection
Jack: Extension port no. (01…24) GRP: Extension group no. (1…8)
All: Not stored
Auto attendant no.
Default
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
7-34
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 35
7 Programming Tables
Selection
Default
Change
[502]
OGM Mode Selection
MODE 1
✓
MODE 2 MODE 3 MODE 4 MODE 5 MODE 6
[503]
FAX Connection
Extension port no. (01…24) / Disable
Disable (Not assigned)
Selection
Default
Change
0 sec
[504]
DISA Delayed Answer Time
3 sec
✓
6 sec 12 sec 0 sec
[505]
DISA Waiting Time after OGM
5 sec
✓
10 sec 15 sec
Selection
Default
Change
[506]
DISA Busy Mode
[507] DISA
Intercept Mode
Disconnect
✓
Call Waiting DISA 2 Intercept
✓
[508]
DISA Ringing Time before Intercept
Disconnect 10 sec 20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
Selection
Default
Change
[509]
DISA Ringing Time after Intercept
10 sec 20 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
✓
[510]
DISA No Dial Mode
Intercept
✓
DISA 1
Disconnect Intercept
✓
DISA 2
Disconnect
Selection
Default
Change
Disable
[513]
Cyclic Tone Detection
2 Times 3 Times 4 Times
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[514] FAX
Tone Detection
1 Time
✓
2 Times
[515] Intercept Time for Internal DISA
3 sec
✓
6 sec 9 sec 1 sec
[517]
DISA AA Wait Time
2 sec
✓
3 sec 4 sec 5 sec
Programming Tables
7-35
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 36
7
Extension port no.
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Programming Tables
Enable
✓
[516] DISA Incoming Assignment
Selection
Disable
Extension port no.
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
Enable
Selection
Disable
Selection
Default
Change
0 sec
✓
[519]
DISA OGM Mute Time
2 sec 4 sec 6 sec
[520]
UCD Group
Extension group no. (1…8)
1
Selection
Default
Change
[521]
UCD Busy Waiting Time
1…32 minutes, 1…59 seconds
10 minutes
[522]
UCD OGM Message Interval Time
30 sec 1 min
✓
1.5 min 2 min
[523]
UCD Busy Mode
Intercept
✓
Disconnect
Selection
Default
Change
[524]
UCD Intercept Mode
Intercept
✓
Disconnect 10 sec
[525]
UCD Ringing Time before Intercept
20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
Selection
Default
Change
10 sec
[526] UCD Ringing Time after Intercept
20 sec
✓
30 sec 40 sec 60 sec 120 sec
7-36
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 37
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
05
06
07
08
01
02
03
04
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
1 2
[600]
Extension Group Assignment
Extension group no. (1…8)
Default: All – Group 1
3 4 5 6 7 8
[604]
Extension Name Setting
Extension name
(10 character max.)
Default: All – Not stored
Programming Tables
7-37
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 38
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
[601] Call Barring – Class of
Service Assignment — Day
1
✓
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
[602] Call Barring – Class of
Service Assignment — Night
1
✓
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
[603] Call Barring – Class of
Service Assignment — Lunch
1
✓
COS no. (1…5)
2 3 4 5
7-38
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 39
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
Option
✓
[605]
Account Code Entry Mode
Selection
Forced Verify-All
Verify-Toll
(Call Barring)
[606] Call Transfer to an Exchange Line
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[607] Call Forwarding to an Exchange Line
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
Programming Tables
7-39
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 40
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
[608] Executive
Busy Override
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[609] Do Not
Disturb Override
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[610] Parallelled
Telephone Connection
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[611]
TAM Extension
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
7-40
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 41
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
[612]
Room Monitor
Assignment
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[613] Exchange Line
Duration Time Limit
Selection
Selection
Enable Disable
✓
[614]
Internal Pulse
Detection
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
English
✓
[615] LCD Language Assignment
Selection
Spanish
Portuguese English
13
14
15
16
09
10
11
12
Selection
Spanish Portuguese
Programming Tables
7-41
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 42
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
E
✓
1
[700] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Day
D E
✓
2
D
[701] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Night
[702] Doorphone Ringing
Assignment — Lunch
E
✓
3
D E
✓
4
1…4: Doorphone no., E: Enable / D: Disable
1 2 3 4 1
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
D E
✓
2
D E
✓
3
D E
✓
4
D
7-42
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 43
7 Programming Tables
Extension port no.
12
13
14
15
08
09
10
11
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
20
21
22
23
24
16
17
18
19
1
E D
✓
[703] Door Opener
Assignment — Day
2
E D
✓
3
E D
✓
[704] Door Opener
Assignment — Night
1…4: Door opener no., E: Enable / D: Disable
4 1 2 3 4 1
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
E D
✓
[705] Door Opener
Assignment — Lunch
2
E D
✓
3
E D
✓
4
E D
✓
Doorphone no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
Single
[706] Doorphone Ringing
/ Tone Pattern Selection
Selection
Double Triple
✓
S-Double
[707] Doorphone
Access Tone Selection
Enable
✓
Selection
Disable
[708] Doorphone
Ringing Time
15 sec
✓
Selection
30 sec
Programming Tables
7-43
PSQX1708ZA-15E.QX 99.10.15 1:12 PM Page 44
7 Programming Tables
Door opener no.
Default: All
1
2
3
4
1 sec 2 sec
[709] Door Opener Time
3 sec 4 sec
Selection
5 sec
✓
6 sec 7 sec 8 sec
Selection
Default
Change
New line code
CR+LF
✓
CR 150
[800] SMDR RS-232C Communication Parameters
300
Baud rate
600 1200 2400 4800 9600
✓
Word length
7 8
✓
Parity
Mark
✓
Space Even Odd None 1
✓
Stop bit
2
Page length
(4…99)
[801] SMDR Parameter
Default
Skip perforation
(0…95)
66
0
Selection
[802] Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing
Default
✓
Selection
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
On
Off
On
Off
Toll
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[803] Secret Speed Dialling /
One-Touch Dialling Printing
No Printing
✓
Printing
[805]
SMDR Account Code Selection
CODE
✓
INDEX
Selection
Default
Change
English
✓
[806]
SMDR Language Assignment
Spanish Portuguese
7-44
Programming Tables
PSQX1708ZA-16E.QX 99.10.15 1:17 PM Page 1
169 mm
185 mm
92.5 mm
PSQX1708ZA-16E.QX 99.10.15 2:35 PM Page 2
Copyright:
This manual is copyrighted by Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. (KME). Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be reproduced in any form, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of KME and its licensee.
C
Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1999
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 8FP
Printed in the United Kingdom
PSQX1708YA
KK1099CM0
PSQX1744ZA-0(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 1
Advanced Hybrid System
KX-TA624
Operating Instructions for the Caller ID Card (KX-TA62493)
In this manual, the suffix of each model number is omitted.
The Caller ID Card supports the following.
It receives the Caller ID service from the Local Exchange. The Caller ID service provides a display proprietary telephone (KX-T7130) user with the caller’s information, such as the name and telephone number, on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls. A contract with a Telephone Company is required.
Incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service can be recorded in memory.
Also, the extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log.
PSQX1744ZA-0(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 2
Contents
Section 1 Installation
1.1
Caller ID Card Installation ..................................................................
1-2
1.2
System Features .....................................................................................
1-4
C
Caller ID .............................................................................................
1-4
S
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) with the Caller ID Card ..................................................................
1-7
1.3
System Programming............................................................................
1-8
[900] Caller ID Assignment..............................................................
1-8
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment............................................
1-8
[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls...................................
1-9
[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls ....................
1-10
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection .............................................
1-11
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format.........................................................
1-11
1.4
Programming Tables .............................................................................
1-12
Section 2 Operations
2.1
Proprietary Telephone Settings............................................................
2-2
Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone .....................................
2-2
2.2
Telephone Features................................................................................
2-4
C
Call Information/Log, Incoming ........................................................
2-4
Call Log, Incoming.............................................................................
2-5
E
Electronic Extension Lockout ............................................................
2-8
2.3
Display Example....................................................................................
2-9
!
!
• For proprietary telephone operations, all button illustrations are based on the KX-T7130.
2
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 1
Section 1
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 2
1.1
Caller ID Card Installation
1. Power off the system, and unplug the AC cord.
2. Loosen the screw.
3. Remove the top front cover.
Top front cover
Screw
4. Remove the 2 screws.
Screws
5. Open the bottom front cover.
Bottom front cover
1-2
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 3
1.1
Caller ID Card Installation
6. Attach the Caller ID Card.
Caller ID Card
(for exchange lines 1 – 3)
Install the Caller ID Card
(for exchange lines 4 – 6) here.
7. Insert the flat cable to the connector.
Note
Please do not damage this part.
Flat cable
8. Close the cover.
!
!
• Be sure the frame of the main unit is connected to the ground (☞ Installation Manual,
2.5 “Frame Ground Connection”).
Installation
1-3
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 4
1.2
System Features
Caller ID
!
!
Provides a display proprietary telephone (KX-T7130) user with the caller’s information, such as the name and telephone number, on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service.
• A contract with a Telephone Company is required.
• An optional Caller ID Card must be installed to the system.
• All 6 exchange lines can be supported by installing 2 Caller ID Cards. One Caller ID
Card supports 3 exchange lines.
• System Programming is required to execute this feature.
• A display proprietary telephone user can record the caller’s information
(☞ 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”). Up to 20 calls can be logged per extension.
• Only the first 16 digits of the caller’s information can be displayed on the LCD while a call is being received, or during a conversation. The first 13 digits are displayed when logged information is shown.
• An assigned name in program [011] “System Speed Dialling Name Setting” will be displayed when the caller’s telephone number matches one of System Speed Dialling numbers assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling Entry” and a Telephone
Company does not provide the caller’s name.
• If a Telephone Company provides a caller’s name, the name from the Telephone
Company will be displayed even when a name assigned in program [011] is effective.
• If both the number and name are available, the user can select the initial display, number or name, by program [904] “Caller ID Log Priority Selection”.
• Some Telephone Companies do not provide the caller’s name with the Caller ID service.
• The caller’s telephone number may not be provided in some cases, for example, an international or mobile telephone call. In this case, the display will show “OUT OF
AREA”, etc.
1-4
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 5
1.2
System Features
Flow chart of Caller ID
An outside call is received by the Caller ID line.
*1
With both the caller’s number and the name
What is the Caller ID service type from the Telephone Company ?
With the caller’s number only
No
Is your area code assigned?
*2
Yes
No
Does the caller’s number match your area code?
Yes
<No modification>
Removing and adding the number.
*3
Removing and adding the number.
*4
The reference number has been fixed.
Does the reference number match
*5 a System Speed Dialling number?
Yes
Is the matched System Speed Dialling number assigned the name?
Yes
*6
Either the number or the name is displayed.
*7
No
No
The number is displayed.
Note: The explanation for *1 through *7 is on the next page.
Installation
1-5
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 6
1.2
System Features
*1: The Caller ID line is assigned in program [900] “Caller ID Assignment”.
*2: Your area code is assigned in program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”.
*3: The caller’s telephone number is modified according to program [902] “Caller ID Modification for Local Calls”.
*4: The caller’s telephone number is modified according to program [903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls”.
*5: System Speed Dialling numbers are assigned in program [001] “System Speed Dialling
Entry”. When one of System Speed Dialling numbers includes the reference number, the system regards them as a match. A line access code (9, 0 or 81 through 86) and/or an account code assigned in program [310] “Account Codes” in the System Speed Dialling number are disregarded for the match. The system checks the System Speed Dialling number after a line access code and/or an account code with the reference number.
*6: Assigning a name to a System Speed Dialling number is in program [011] “System Speed
Dialling Name Setting”.
*7: The user can select the initial display, number or name, by program [904] “Caller ID Log
Priority Selection”. The displayed number is the caller’s telephone number, not the modified one.
Example (With the caller’s number only):
[901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”: 201
[903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls”: Deleted digits – 3
Added number – 1
<Caller’s telephone number>
123 456 789
<Modified (reference) number >
1456 789
[001] “System Speed Dialling Entry”: (Speed dialling no. 30)
81 1234 1456789 line access code account code match
[011] “System Speed Dialling Name Setting”: (Speed dialling no. 30) Richard
[904] “Caller ID Log Priority Selection”: Name
<Display>
Richard
• The name and the number can be displayed alternately by pressing Caller ID Selection button
(☞ 2.1 Proprietary Telephone Settings,
“Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone”,
Caller ID Selection Button (Assignment)).
123456789
1-6
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 7
1.2
System Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) with the Caller ID Card
When the Caller ID Card is installed, a received caller’s telephone number (maximum 16 digits) will be printed out after <incoming> or <DISA incoming> as shown below, if the calling party has enabled Caller ID service. Refer to the Installation Manual, Section 3
Features, “Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)” for more information about SMDR.
An example of a printed call record:
Date Time Ext.
CO
31/12/98 12:52PM 203
31/12/98 12:53PM 203
31/12/98 *12:54PM 201
31/12/98 1:04PM 203
31/12/98 1:04PM 202
31/12/98 1:05PM 203
31/12/98 1:06PM 203
31/12/98 1:06PM 202
31/12/98 1:07PM 203
31/12/98 2:15PM 203
31/12/98 2:26PM 203
31/12/98 2:27PM 216
31/12/98 3:25PM
05
01
01
02
05
02
02
06
01
01
01
05
02
Dial number Duration Code
12345678901234567890123456789012
<
< incoming incoming
092. . . 1438
>2013570846
00:00'16
00:01'43 . . . .
>1234567890123456 00:07'48 . . . .
00:00'06
. . . .
4536
092123456789
0921234567
0921234567
0921234567
F/0927654321
9=0924567123
00:00'09 . . . .
00:00'08 . . . .
00:00'08 . . . .
00:00'17 . . . .
00:11'00
00:11'00
. . 13
. 201
00:03'00 . . . .
00:13'55 . . . .
00:11'48 . . . .
!
!
☞
• A received caller’s telephone number will be printed out only when “With CID” is selected in program [906] “Caller ID SMDR Format”.
• Related Feature References
Installation Manual, Section 3 Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Installation
1-7
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 8
1.3
System Programming
[900]-[901]
[900] Caller ID Assignment
Enables or disables the Caller ID feature for each exchange line which has contracted the
Caller ID service from a Telephone Company.
9 0 0
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue exchange line no.*
(1···6/ )
SELECT
(Enable/
Disable)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
!
!
* Exchange line number: 1 through 6 / (All exchange lines)
Default
All exchange lines – Disable
• The exchange lines, if set to “Enable” in this program, always set the DISA Delayed
Answer timer to 6 seconds even if “0 sec” or “3 sec” is selected in program [504] “DISA
Delayed Answer Time”.
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment
Assigns your area code (up to 5 codes) which is required to use the Caller ID feature. If the received caller’s number has one of the assigned area codes, it is recognised as a local call.
If the area code is different, it is recognised as a long distance call. By assigning your area code, the system records the caller’s number modified in programs [902] “Caller ID
Modification for Local Calls” or [903] “Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls”.
9 0 1
NEXT
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue code no.
(1···5)
area code
6 digits max.
(0···9)
STORE
To continue
SELECT
END
Default
Not stored.
!
!
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
1-8
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 9
[902]
1.3
System Programming
[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls
Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received local call number, which has one of area codes programmed in [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment”. This program makes the final number which will be recorded in memory. The extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log. Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number.
9 0 2
NEXT
< Assigns the deleted digits. > deleted digits
(0···9)
STORE
If added number is assigned
END
< Assigns the added number. > added number
STORE
4 digits max.
(0···9,#, )
END
Example:
[901]: 201
[902]: Deleted digits – 3 / Added number – Not stored
Caller’s number provided by the Local Exchange: 2011234567
Logged (modified) number : 1234567
!
!
Default
Deleted digits – 3 / Added number – Not stored.
• Program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment” is required for this program.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
Installation
1-9
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.15 9:45 AM Page 10
1.3
System Programming
[903]
[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls
Assigns the removed digits and added number for a received long distance call number, which does not have any area codes programmed in [901] “Caller ID Area Code
Assignment”. This program makes the final number which will be recorded in memory.
The extension user can call back the caller easily by checking the call log. Digits are removed from or added to the beginning of the received number.
9 0 3
NEXT
< Assigns the deleted digits. > deleted digits
(0···9)
STORE END
If added number is assigned
< Assigns the added number. > added number
4 digits max.
(0···9,#, )
STORE END
!
!
Example:
[901]: 201
[903]: Deleted digits – 0 (No deletion) / Added number – 1
Caller’s number provided by the Local Exchange: 7149876543
Logged (modified) number : 17149876543
Default
Deleted digits – 0 (No deletion) / Added number – 1
• Program [901] “Caller ID Area Code Assignment” is required for this program.
• To correct a wrong entry, press the CLEAR button and enter the new one.
1-10
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.25 5:55 PM Page 11
[904], [906]
1.3
System Programming
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection
Selects the first display of an incoming outside call by the Caller ID service. Either the name or number can be selected if the Caller ID service supports both the name and number.
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
!
!
9 0 4
NEXT extension port no.*
SELECT
(01···16/ )
(Name/
Number)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
* Extension port number: 01 through 16 / (All extension ports)
END
Default
All extension ports – Name
• This program is available when your Caller ID service provides both the name and number.
If only the number is provided, this program is not necessary.
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format
Selects whether a Caller ID number is printed out or not on an SMDR printout.
!
!
9 0 6
NEXT
SELECT
(Without CID/
With CID)*
STORE
* Without CID (Not printed) / With CID (Printed)
Default
With CID
END
• Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed.
Installation
1-11
PSQX1744ZA-1(E).QX 99.10.25 5:55 PM Page 12
1.4
Programming Tables
Selection
Enable
Disable
Default
All
[900] Caller ID Assignment
1
Exchange line no. (1…6, : All)
2 3 4 5 6
✓
CODE no.
Default
1
2
3
4
5
[901] Caller ID Area Code Assignment
Parameter: 6 digits max., 0 – 9
All: Not stored
Selection
Number of digits to be deleted
(0…9, 0: no deletion)
Number to be added
(4 digits max.)
[902] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls
Default Change
3 blank (not stored)
[903] Caller ID Modification for Long Distance Calls
Default
0
1
Change
Extension jack no.
Default: All
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Number
[904] Caller ID Log Priority Selection
Selection
Name
✓
Selection
Default
Change
[906] Caller ID SMDR Format
Without CID With CID
✓
Extension jack no.
17
18
19
20
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
Number
Selection
Name
1-12
Installation
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 1
Section 2
Operations
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 2
2.1
Proprietary Telephone Settings
Customising the Buttons on Your Telephone
Caller ID Indication Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Indication button. The Caller ID
Indication button can be used in the following cases.
1) Informing you that there is new caller information logged by lighting the indicator
2) Recording caller’s information in memory during a conversation
3) Checking logged caller’s information while on-hook
4) Calling back the logged number
PT
CO
6
AUTO DIAL
STORE
Press STORE.
Press the desired Flexible CO button you wish to assign as the Caller ID
Indication button.
<PT Display Example>
CID Indication
Dial 6.
• The STORE indicator lights.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
!
!
☞
• Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
• To program, set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.
• After programming, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Information/Log, Incoming”
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”
2-2
Operations
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 3
2.1
Proprietary Telephone Settings
Caller ID Selection Button (Assignment)
Allows you to assign a Flexible line key as the Caller ID Selection button. The Caller ID
Selection button can be used in the following cases.
1) Confirming a caller’s information while receiving a call or during a conversation
2) Checking the number of logged calls
3) Informing you when no more caller’s information can be logged by lighting the indicator
PT
CO
7
AUTO DIAL
STORE
Press STORE.
Press the desired Flexible CO button you wish to assign as the Caller ID
Selection button.
<PT Display Example>
CID Selection
Dial 7.
• The STORE indicator lights.
• The display shows the initial programming mode.
!
!
☞
• Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
• To program, set the MEMORY switch on the proprietary telephone to “PROGRAM”.
• After programming, return the MEMORY switch to the “SET” position.
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Information/Log, Incoming”
• 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”
Operations
2-3
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 4
2.2
Telephone Features
Call Information/Log, Incoming
Provides you with the caller’s telephone number and name simultaneously on the exchange line assigned to receive Caller ID service calls, if the Caller ID service supports both the telephone number and name.
If the call is not answered, the call information is automatically recorded in memory
(
☞ 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call Log, Incoming”).
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)
While receiving an incoming call (on-hook) or during a conversation
(off-hook), the display shows the caller’s telephone number or name.
While receiving an incoming call
JOHN WHITE
• If you want to see other information, press the Caller ID
Selection button. The display changes as follows.
JOHN WHITE
(caller’s name)
0111111111
Call on CO 1
(caller’s telephone number)
(CO number)
During a conversation
!
!
JOHN WHITE
• Press the Caller ID Selection button to see other information.
The display changes as follows.
JOHN WHITE
(caller’s name)
0111111111
(caller’s telephone number)
CO 2 12:00’30
(call duration)
• The Caller ID Indication button indicator light may turn on when a call is received.
• You can modify and call back the logged numbers. Refer to 2.2 Telephone Features, “Call
Log, Incoming”.
• System Programming determines which is displayed first, the name or number.
• You can program whether to print out a Caller ID number on the SMDR or not by System
Programming.
2-4
Operations
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 5
2.2
Telephone Features
Call Log, Incoming
If you do not answer a call, your extension (KX-T7130 only) automatically records the incoming outside call information from the Caller ID service, and the Caller ID Indication button indicator lights. Up to 20 calls can be logged per extension. When the call log is full
(20 calls are stored), you can select how the twenty-first call is treated. Either a new call can be disregarded or the new call can overwrite the oldest call that you have already confirmed
(Default: Record the new call.).
You can also modify and call back the logged numbers.
Even if you answer a call, the call information can be recorded by pressing the Caller ID
Indication button during the conversation.
Overwriting the call log
PT
Lift the handset or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
7 3 7 1
Dial 7371.
#
Dial #.
Confirmation tone and dial tone
Hang up or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
<PT Display Example>
Incoming Log On
Disregarding the twenty-first call
PT
Lift the handset or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
7 3 7 0
Dial 7370.
#
Dial #.
Confirmation tone and dial tone
Hang up or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
<PT Display Example>
Incoming Log Off
Operations
2-5
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 6
2.2
Telephone Features
Checking
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)
When the Caller ID Indication button indicator is red, there are new calls logged.
01:0111111111
02:0924773333
1. Press the Caller ID Selection button to confirm the number of logged calls.
<Example>
If there are 2 unchecked calls and 3 checked calls:
New:02 Old:03
• The a bove information will be displayed for 3 seconds.
2. Press the Caller ID Indication button while on-hook to see the incoming call information.
• The new information that you have not checked will be displayed first.
3. You can check another caller’s information by pressing the Caller
ID Indication button again.
After displaying all of the new information, the old information you have already checked will be displayed.
• To modify the telephone number, use the HOLD button to erase from the first digit. “0 to 9,
, # and PAUSE” can be used to add numbers from the first digit.
• To clear the displayed information, press the TRANSFER button.
• To clear all logged call information, go off-hook and press 70 #.
The display shows as follows.
CID Log Clear
• To return to the initial display, go off-hook and on-hook, or wait for 20 seconds.
• Pressing the Caller ID Selection button provides you with further information about the party.
The display changes as follows.
<Example>
If the information is stored in log 03,
03:BOB HANKS
— caller’s name
03:0011223344
— caller’s number
03:30Oct 09:00PM
— date and time
• If “OUT OF AREA” is displayed, the call may be from out of the calling area.
• If “LONG DISTANCE” is displayed, it may be a long distance call.
• If “PRIVATE” is displayed, the caller chose not to show their information.
2-6
Operations
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 7
2.2
Telephone Features
Calling back
Display Operation (— for the KX-T7130 only)
03:0011223344
1. Confirm the number displayed in step 2 or 3 of “Checking” (on the previous page), and lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the Caller ID Indication button.
• You may press a line key first to select a specified exchange line.
The last displayed number is dialled.
!
!
PT
• When “Disregarding the twenty-first call” has been set and 20 calls are logged, or when
“Overwriting the call log” has been set and all 20 old information has been overwritten, the
Caller ID Selection button indicator lights and informs you that no more calls can be logged.
Operations
2-7
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 8
2.2
Telephone Features
Electronic Extension Lockout
Allows you to lock your extension so that the “Call Log, Incoming” feature is not shown on the display when you press the Caller ID Indication button, if you do not want others to see the information. This feature also prevents others from making outside calls from your extension.
Locking
PT
7 7
Lift the handset or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
Dial 77.
same code
lock code lock code
Enter the 4-digit lock code
(0000 through 9999) twice.
#
Dial #.
Confirmation tone and dial tone.
Hang up or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
<PT Display Example>
Locked : xxxx
Lock Code
Unlocking
PT
Lift the handset or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
7 7
Dial 77.
lock code
#
Enter the same lock code you used to lock the extension.
Dial #.
Confirmation tone and dial tone.
Hang up or press
SP-PHONE/MONITOR.
<PT Display Example>
Unlocked
!
!
☞
PT
PT
• The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions (Electronic Extension
Lockout — CANCEL ALL).
• “Remote Extension Lock” overrides this feature. If the operator or manager sets Remote
Extension Lock on the extension you have already locked, you cannot unlock it.
Operating Instructions, Section 1 Operations
• 1.6 Before Leaving Your Desk, “Locking Your Telephone (Electronic Extension Lockout)”
• 1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Electronic Extension Lockout — CANCEL ALL”
• 1.8 Operator / Manager Service Features, “Remote Extension Lock”
2-8
Operations
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 9
2.3
Display Example
Due to the Trilingual Selection Feature, you can select the display in English, Spanish or Portuguese by
System Programming. The left part is the English display and the right part is the Spanish display.
E
NGLISH
D
ISPLAY
CID Log Clear
Incoming Log Off
Incoming Log On
Locked:xxxx
New:02 Old:03
Unlocked
S
PANISH
D
ISPLAY
RID Despejado
Registro ID Off
Registro ID On
Bloqueado
Nue:02 Ant:03
Desbloqueada
D
ESCRIPTION
Cleared all logs.
Cancelled “Incoming Call Log”.
“Incoming Call Log” is set.
Completed setting “Electronic Extension Lockout”.
Confirming the number of logged calls.
Cancelled “Electronic Extension Lockout”.
Operations
2-9
PSQX1744ZA-2(E).QX 99.10.15 9:46 AM Page 10
Panasonic Business Systems U.K.
Panasonic House, Willoughby Road, Bracknell, Berkshire RG12 8FP
Printed in the United Kingdom
PSQX1744YA
KK1099CM1109SM
To expand the sub-menu, left click the mouse on the symbol, located to the left of the selected text.
for version 3 Adobe Reader
for version 4 Adobe Reader
KX-TA624 Feature / Programming Overview
The KX-TA624 has many new and changed features compared with the KX-T30810 / 61610
This Guide is intended to assist installers who are already familiar with the KX-T30810 / 61610
This Guide clearly shows the Changed and New features of the KX-TA624 with reference to KX-T30810 / 61610.
Programming
(General overview only)
:
Main Section Sub - Sections
SYSTEM FEATURES
CO LINE
JACKS
DATE / TIME
Setting the system clock
SPEED DIAL
Setting the System Speed Dials
SYSTEM SWITCHING MODE
Day / Night / Lunch TIME
VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
Voice Mail set-up
SYSTEM TIMERS
OUTGOING CALLS
INCOMING RINGING MODE
Day [414] / Night [415] / Lunch [416]
LINE CONNECTED
DIAL MODE
DIAL PULSE SPEED
O/G ASSIGNMENT
ARS (LCR) ASSIGNMENT
NORMAL I/C Ring Pattern
Delayed Ring
DIL ( Direct In Line )
Must be used for call FWD
EXTENSIONS
DISA / UCD / FAX / OGM
DSS CONSOLE Assignment
Transfer Mode
CALL BARRING (COS) TABLES
COS ASSIGNMENT
EXTENSION GROUPS
FEATURES
FAX DETECTION
( option required )
TAM EXTENSION
( Telephone Answer Machine )
DOORPHONE / OPENER
NEW
Programming
Step
000
001
006
007
102 ~ 103
200 ~ 213
400
401
402
405 ~ 407
350 ~ 389
408 ~ 410
411 ~ 413
Enter Jack
No.
500 ~ 526
003 ~ 004
005
300 ~ 312
601 ~ 603
600
604 ~ 615
503
611
700 ~ 709
Documentation :
Operating Instructions :
Installation Manual :
Section 1
Section 2
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
Section 4
Section 5
Section 6
Section 7
Operations
Appendix / Troubleshooting
Basic System Construction
Installation of System and all Options
Feature descriptions
System Programming steps
Default Tables for program steps
Troubleshooting Guide
Customer Data Programming Tables
Programming note :
System Programming :
Data Clear Switch :
A Programming Password has replaced the PBX Program Switch ( KX-T30810/61610 )
( Password Default Setting : ‘* # 1 2 3 4’ )
Details in the Installation Manual ( Page 4 - 2 )
An internal ‘Data Clear’ switch has been added to the CPU board.
Operation described in the Installation Manual ( Page 2 - 34 )
( 1 of 6 )
04
05
06
07
-
08
09
-
10
11
33
14
-
-
-
KX-T
30810
00
01
-
03
-
21
22
23
17
-
-
KX-T
61610
00
01
02
04
CURRENT & CHANGED
P rogramming Steps
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )
KX-TA
624
000
001
003
004
401
Description
Date / Time
System Speed Dial
DSS Console Assignment
DSS Console
Pair Telephone No.
Dial Mode
DTMF / Pulse
Changed or Enhanced
Features
DSS Console and Paired Telephone
Assignment are now separate steps
‘Call Blocking’ has been added i.e. DTMF is not sent to a pulse mode
CO line when dialling from a MF telephone.
05
06
07
08
-
09
10
-
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
Ext. / CO
20
21
22
23
24
26
27
29
-
403
-
411
412
413
411 ~ 413
-
700
701
702
127
204
800 ~ 801
802
006
007
Day / Night / Lunch
405
406
407
408
409
410
601
602
603
302 ~ 305
System Switching Mode
Automatic / Manual
System Switching Time
Flexible Outward Dialling - Day
Flexible Outward Dialling - Night
Flexible Outward Dialling - Lunch
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Day
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Night
Flexible Ringing Assignment - Lunch
Call Barring Class Assignment - Day
Call Barring Class Assignment - Night
Call Barring Class Assignment - Lunch
Call Barring - Deny Codes
306 Call Barring - Allow Codes
Automatic Answer Mode
Host PBX Access Codes
Programmable Call Waiting
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Day
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Night
Delayed Ringing Assignment - Lunch
Delayed Ringing count
Intercom Alert Tone ( Voice / Tone )
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Night
Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Lunch
Dial Call Pickup
Call Duration Count Start Timer
SMDR Communication Parameters
SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Selection
‘Day of week’ & ‘Lunch
Start / End’ times added
‘Lunch’ Mode added
‘Lunch’ Mode added
COS assignment added for
Day / Night / Lunch
Modes
COS levels 4 & 5 added
COS levels 4 & 5 added
Set by extension user
(Operating Instructions Page 1-35)
Set by extension user
( Operating Instructions Page 1-45 )
Delayed Ringing assignment added for each mode
Included in Program Steps 411 ~ 413
Set by extension user
(Operating Instructions Page 1-82)
Doorphone Ringing assignment added for each mode
Sets the Pickup Groups for Extns.
( 2 of 6)
70
-
-
71
72
73
-
31
-
34
18
19
20
-
28
12
KX-T
30810
25
26
27
29
75
98
99
-
-
-
74
70
71
-
72
73
75
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
43
-
KX-T
61610
30
31
32
33
76
98
99
-
-
-
74
418
422
420
005
107
201
-
419
-
703
704
705
350
351 ~ 354
300
355 ~ 358
381 ~ 384
-
360
361
362
363
364
385 ~ 388
389
359
CURRENT & CHANGED
Programming Steps
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )
KX-TA
624
-
200
106
-
999
Description Changed or Enhanced
Features
Preset to 15 secs Hold Time Reminder
Hold Recall Time Set
External Pager Access Tone
Programmable Secret Speed Dials
Recall Time
Disconnect Time
Calling Party Control
DSS Button Mode
With / Without transfer
DTMF Receiver Check
Transfer Recall Time
F3 / FWD Key
Sets F3 to a FWD Key
Automatic CO Line access Outgoing
Programmable Call Waiting Tone Type
Door Opener Assignment - Day
Door Opener Assignment - Night
Door Opener Assignment - Lunch
ARS Enable / Disable
First Digit of ARS Code
Carrier Excepted Codes, disregards codes when applying ARS or Call Barring
Carrier Codes Assignment
Authorisation Code
Carrier Access Code
ARS Modification – Remove Digits
ARS Modification – Added Digits
ARS Dial Tone Pattern
ARS Interdigit Time
ARS Trunk Group
Itemised Bill by Extension
Assigns the Bill code to each Extension
BT Access Code
Station Program Clear
System Data Clear
Separate ‘Secret’ table not provided
Refer to ‘Secret Dialling’
( Installation Manual Page 3 – 62 )
No Earth Recall Option
More time options added
( 15secs / 30secs / 1 min / 2mins )
Set by extension user
(Operating Instructions Page 1-12)
Set by extension user
(Operating Instructions Page 1-7)
Door Opening can now be assigned for each Mode
Enabled on an individual CO basis i.e. Call blocking code (*141)
Stored Carrier Codes are disregarded
Sets the Access Code
Removes digits before sending
Adds digits before the dialled number
Selects the Dial Tone generated
Assigns the wait time for ARS
Assigns the trunk group used by ARS
Set by Extension user
(Operating Instructions Page 1-7)
( 3 of 6 )
203
206
207
208
210
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
202
Step Program Title
010
011
012
100
101
102
103
104
105
002
008
009
108
109
110
111
112
115
116
117
118
System Password
Operator Assignment
Extension Number Assignment
LCD Time Display Selection
Speed Dial Number Set
Alternative Feature Number Plan
Hunt Group
Station Hunt Type
Voice Mail Port
Voice Mail Port
DTMF Integration
Hold Mode Selection
Conference Tone
Recall Mode of a Station Locked
Extension
CO Indicator Assignment
Recall Key Mode
Hold Music Selection
External Music / Tone
DSS Console Indication Mode
( for FWD / DND )
Extension Ringing Pattern Selection
Conference Pattern Selection
Call Pick-up Tone
Pulse Restriction
Redialling after Pulse / Tone conversion
Bell Frequency
Automatic Line Access Number
Auto Rotation of Line Access
Break Ratio
SLT Ring Mode
Call Barring Check for * , #
DSS Off-Hook Mode
Call Forward Start Time
Pickup Dial Delay Time
( Hot Telephone )
Dial Start Time
Recall Timing Range
Interdigit Time
DTMF Time
NEW
P rogramming Steps
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )
Feature Description Default
Replaces the PBX Programming Switch
( Installation Manual Page 4 –3 )
Assigns the System Operator Telephone
* # : System Prog
1234 : Password
Jack : 01
Allows the extension numbering scheme to be changed Jack 01 ( Ext. 201 )
24 ( Ext. 224 )
12 / 24 hour clock display options 12 HOUR
Used for Speed Dials and Call ID Feature
Replaces feature with a code 50 ~ 59
Enables Station Hunting for Extension Groups
Not stored
Not stored
All groups : Disabled
Assigns Hunting Type for Extension Groups
Enables Jacks ( assigned as Voice Mail Ports ) to send DTMF signalling to Voice Mail
Enables signalling of Call Status information to
Voice Mail ports ( busy, answered, ringing, etc. )
Assigns Call Hold Mode for SLT extensions
( Example - HOLD 1 : Recall + on-hook )
Confirmation Tone sent at the Start and End of a Conference Call
Allows locked extensions to send a Recall signal whilst talking to an external call
Allows an extension, not programmed to ring
[408 – 410] to receive the call by pressing the CO Line button
Mode1: Sends Recall signal time ( Prog. Step 418 )
Mode2: Recall signal is sent while the button is pressed
Assigns External Music or Tone (Beep)
All groups : Terminate
Jacks 07 / 08 / 15 / 16 :
Disabled
Disabled
HOLD 1
Enable ( send )
Disabled ( not allowed )
Enable ( Allow )
Mode 1
External Music
Assigns if an extension set as FWD/DND shows as a flashing button on the BLF/ DSS
Sets Single / Double / Triple Ring Pattern
Set the max. number of parties in a conference
Confirmation tone sent when the Call Pickup feature is used
Enables / Disables pulses being sent to the CO Line during a conversation
( when Call Block is set in program step 401 )
Allows Redial to use tone dialling on a pulse CO Line if the call had used * and # to convert to Tone
Sets the Bell Frequency for an SLT device
If set at ‘0’ Operator call becomes ‘9’
Auto rotation of CO lines seized
Sets the break ratio to CO lines
Length of SLT Ring Cycle
Assigns if * and # are checked by the COS program
Making Intercom call by pressing DSS key
Call FWD no answer timer
Options : 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 secs
Auto Dial time delay
Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 secs
Time between seizing a CO Line and digits being sent
Range : 0 ~ 1500 milliseconds
Sets the Range for Extensions - SLT
Maximum time allowed between digits when dialling out. Options : 5 / 10 / 15 secs
Assigns the minimum duration
Enable ( Flashing )
Single
5 party (C-2 E-5)
Enabled ( Tone )
Enable
Disable
25 Hz
Dial 9
Disabled (no rotate)
Mode 1 (66%)
Mode 2 (3 sec)
Enable ( Check )
Enable
15 secs
3 secs
0 mS
Mode 1 (50 ~ 180 mS)
20 secs
(Prior to disconnection )
Mode 1 (80 mS)
( 4 of 6)
Step Program Title
211
212
213
301
309
310
311
312
400
402
404
414 to
416
417
421
423
424
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
513
No Dial Disconnection
CO Line Duration Limit
Bell Off Detection
Call Barring – System Speed Dial
Boundary Class
Emergency Dial Number Set
Account Codes
Automatic Pause Insertion Codes
Call Barring – Extension Lock
CO Line Connected Assignment
Pulse Speed Selection
CO Line Group Assignment
Outside Line Mode
( Day / Night / Lunch )
Pause Time
CPC Detection for Outgoing Calls
Reverse (Polarity) Check
DISA Incoming Dialling Mode
Selection - Auto Attendant
DISA Built-in Auto Attendant
OGM Mode Selection
( KX-TA 62491 required )
FAX Connection
( KX-TA 62491 required )
DISA Delayed Answer Time
DISA Waiting Time after OGM
DISA Busy Mode
DISA Intercept Mode
Disconnect / Intercept
DISA Ring Time before Intercept
DISA Ring time After Intercept
DISA No Dial Mode
Cyclic Tone Detection
( OGM option KX-TA62491 required )
NEW
P rogramming Steps
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )
Feature Description
CO Line Ringing Pattern Selection
Default
Call disconnects if 1 st
Digit is not dialled within 20 seconds of seizing a CO Line
Sets maximum CO call time (Enabled Prog 613)
Sets the wait time between bell signals from CO line
Assigns the call barring class for System Speed Dial
Numbers
Stored ‘Emergency’ telephone numbers override the following : ‘COS Level’ / ‘Account Code Modes’ /
‘Electronic Extension Lock’
Assigns Account Codes for ‘Verify - All’ mode
40 codes can be assigned as Pause Codes.
Pause [ duration prog. step 417 ] is inserted after the code
COS level applied to Locked Extensions
Options : COS Levels 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / Disabled
Defines connected CO’s
Sets CO Line ‘Pulse Speed’
Options : 10 / 20 pps
Trunk Group assignment of CO’s
Enable
( disconnect )
10 mins
3 secs
Class 1
Locations
01 : 999 02 : 112
03 ~ 05 : Not stored
01 ~ 24 : Not stored i.e. 01 : 1234
01 ~ 40 : Not Stored i.e. 01 : 1234567
Disabled
CO 1 ~ 6 : Connected
10 pps
NORMAL : Follows programming steps 408 ~ 410
DIL : Assigns one ext. to receive I/C CO call
(must be used if Call FWD is required)
DISA1 : The caller will hear a Tone or OGM
DISA2 : The caller will hear two different OGM
UCD : Call will be rec’d via UCD function
Assigns the Host PBX pause time
Enables CPC detection during an outside call.
If CPC is detected, the system disconnects the line
( disconnection time Program Step 420 )
Incoming CO Line ringing pattern
Options : Single / Double / Triple Ring
Detects CO Line reversal
Without AA System accepts : Ext. / Access No.
With AA System accepts : Ext. / Access / AA No.
Assigns Auto Attendant numbers ‘0 ~ 9’ to extension jacks
Mode 1 ~ 6 DISA or UCD functions can be used
to receive IC calls
Assigns an extension to receive FAX calls when CNG is detected
Assigns delay in DISA answering a call
Options : 0 / 3 / 6 / 12 secs
Selects time the system waits for DTMF or CNG tone after OGM played
Options : 0 / 5 / 10 / 15 secs
Sets DISA response to a dialled busy extensions
Options : Call waiting / Disconnect / play OGM 2
Sets DISA response to unanswered calls
Options : Disconnect / Intercept
Sets DISA Intercept time for unanswered calls
Options : 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120secs
Sets the ring time at the Intercept destination
Options : 10 / 20 / 30 / 40 / 60 / 120secs
Selects action taken by DISA if no response is received after OGM ( e.g. DTMF or CNG )
Options : Intercept / Disconnect
Sets the number of times Cyclic Tone has to be detected before the system regards the call as complete
Options : Disable ( does not detect ) / 2 / 3 / 4 times
CO 1 : Trunk Group 1 through to
CO 6 : Trunk Group 6
NORMAL
1.5 secs
Disable
Double
Disabled
Without AA
0 ~ 9 : Not stored i.e. 0 : Jack 01
Mode 1
All Jacks : Disabled
3 secs
5 secs
Disconnect
Intercept
20 secs
20 secs
DISA1 : Intercept
DISA2 : Intercept
4 times
( 5 of 6 )
612
613
614
615
706
606
607
608
609
610
611
707
708
709
803
804
805
523
524
525
526
600
604
605
519
520
521
522
Step Program Title
514
515
516
517
Fax Tone Detection
( KX-TA62491 option required )
Intercept Time for Internal DISA
DISA Incoming Assignment
DISA AA Wait Time
806
998
DISA Mute Time
UCD Group
UCD Busy Waiting Time
UCD OGM Message Interval Time
UCD Busy Mode
UCD Intercept Time
UCD Ring Time before Intercept
UCD Ring Time after Intercept
Extension Groups
Extension Name Setting
Account Code Entry Mode
Option / Forced / Verify - All
Verify – Toll
Call Transfer to CO Line
Call Forward To CO Line
Executive Busy Override
Do Not Disturb Override
Parallel Connection
TAM Extension
( Telephone Answering Machine )
Room Monitor Assignment
Exchange Line Duration Limit
Internal Pulse Detection
LCD Language Assignment
Doorphone Ringing Tone / Pattern
Doorphone Access Tone Selection
Doorphone Ring Time
Door Opener Time
Secret Speed Dialling / One Touch
Dial Printing
System Data Dump
SMDR Account Code Selection
SMDR Language Selection
ROM Version
NEW
P rogramming Steps
( with reference to the KX-T30810 / 61610 )
Feature Description Default
Sets the number of times the FAX / CNG tone has to be detected
Options : 1 / 2 Times
Sets intercept time for an internal DISA call
Options : 3 / 6 / 9 secs
Assigns which extensions can receive DISA calls
1 Time
3 secs
All jacks : Enable
(accept)
2 secs Sets AA second digit wait time
If no digit received within this time call is routed by program step 501. Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 secs
Assigns the wait time after answering
Assigns the Extension Group for UCD
Assigns the Time the UCD holds an IC call
Assigns the Time between messages
Assigns the operation after [521] Timer expires
Assigns the operation when [525] Timer expires
Assigns the UCD Extensions No Answer time
Assigns the Ring time after intercept
Sets Extension groups (used for Hunting)
Assigns a name to an extension
Selects the Account code input mode
Optional/Forced/Verify – All : Set if code must be used
Verify – Toll : Temporarily changes COS to level 2
Permits call transfer to a CO Line
Permits calls to be forwarded to a CO Line
Allows a call to barge an established call
Permits the Do Not Disturb Override function
Permits an SLT to be connected in parallel with a
Proprietary Telephone
Assigns TAM extension
Allows Call Retrieval feature
Assigns which jacks can be monitored by another proprietary telephone
Limits the max. time for Extensions
Disables Pulse Detection from Extensions
Set the LCD Display language
Doorphone ringing pattern
Options : Single / Double / Triple Ring
Assigns if a tone is sent to the Doorphone when it is monitored
Doorphone ringing time
Options : 15 / 30 secs
Door unlocked time
Options : 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 secs
Enables or disables SMDR printout for these numbers
0 secs
Group 1
10 min
1 min
Intercept
Intercept
20 secs
20 secs
All jacks : Group 1
Not stored
Option
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
All jacks : Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
All jacks : English
Triple
Doorphones 1 ~ 4 :
Enable
15 secs
(send tone)
Doorphones
1 ~ 4 : 5 secs
No printing
Outputs all System Data to SMDR
Sets SMDR Account Code printout
CODE : Account code
INDEX : The two digit account code location
Set SMDR Language
Confirms the System ROM version
CODE
English
No Default
( 6 of 6)
advertisement
Key Features
- System Expansion
- Hybrid
- Calling from the outside
- Telephone Answering Machine
- Door Openers
- Doorphones
- Voice Processing System